Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / Close Brothers Group

Close Brothers Group

cbg · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker cbg
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2016 Annual Report · Close Brothers Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
C

l

o

s

e

B

r

o

t

h

e

r

s

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

6

Modern Merchant Banking

Close Brothers Group plc
Annual Report 2016

 
 
 
 
 
 
Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016

Close Brothers is a leading UK
merchant banking group providing
lending, deposit taking, wealth
management services and
securities trading.

Strategic Report
  4  Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s 

Statement
  8  Business Model
12  Strategy and Key Performance 

Indicators
Financial Overview

14 
20  Banking
24  Securities
26  Asset Management
28  Principal Risks and Uncertainties
32  Sustainability Report

Governance
42  Board of Directors
44  Executive Committee
45  Report of the Directors
47  Corporate Governance
60  Report of the Board on  
Directors’ Remuneration

Financial Statements
84 

Independent Auditor’s Report to 
the Members of Close Brothers 
Group plc

87  Consolidated Income Statement
88  Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income
89  Consolidated Balance Sheet
90  Consolidated Statement of 

Changes in Equity
91  Consolidated Cash Flow 

Statement

92  Company Balance Sheet
93  Company Statement of Changes 

in Equity

94  The Notes
135  Glossary
136  Investor Relations
136  Cautionary Statement

Welcome to  
Modern Merchant Banking

Financial Highlights
for the year ended 31 July 2016

1

Modern Merchant Banking is about 
meeting the financial needs of our  
clients today while applying the  
traditional values of our past.

At Close Brothers we provide financial support 
and advice to small businesses and individuals 
in the UK. Our clients are the makers of things, 
the wealth creators, the investors and the 
savers. They are playing an important role 
driving growth in the British economy and we 
are supporting them as they grow.

Throughout our distinguished history, we have 
remained focused on upholding our traditional 
values, based on service and integrity. At the 
same time, we encourage innovation and 
support enterprise, reflecting how our clients  
do business.

At Close Brothers we call it Modern Merchant 
Banking. We believe our traditional values and 
modern thinking are the reason behind our 
success and why our clients continue to  
turn to us.

Adjusted1 operating  
profit from continuing 
operations

£233.6m

(2015: £224.9m)
2016

£233.6m

2015

2014

2013

2012

£224.9m

£193.7m

£167.2m

£134.2m

Adjusted2 basic earnings 
per share from continuing 
operations

128.4p

(2015: 120.5p)
2016

128.4p

2015

2014

2013

2012

120.5p

101.0p

83.5p

67.3p

Return on opening equity3 
from continuing operations

Ordinary dividend  
per share4

18.9%

(2015: 19.5%)
2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

18.9%

19.5%

17.9%

15.8%

12.5%

57.0p

(2015: 53.5p)
2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

57.0p

53.5p

49.0p

44.5p

41.5p

Operating profit before tax 
from continuing operations

Basic earnings per share 
from continuing operations

£228.5m

(2015: £219.9m)

125.7p

(2015: 117.8p)

Profit attributable to 
shareholders from 
continuing and 
discontinued operations

£186.5m

(2015: £185.7m)

The photography within this Annual Report was 
photographed on location at our clients’ businesses.
We would like to thank them for their generous  
support and cooperation.

1  Stated before amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition. A reconciliation 

to operating profit before tax is shown on page 15.

2  Stated before amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition and the tax 

effect of such adjustment.

3  Return on opening equity calculated as adjusted operating profit after tax and 
non-controlling interests on opening equity less non-controlling interests.
4  Represents the final dividend proposed for the respective years together with 

the interim dividend declared and paid in those years.

Front cover: Photographed on location at BCW Engineering Ltd.

Opposite: Photographed on location at Alicat Workboats Ltd.

Note: Relevant figures and ratios for 2015 are re-presented for changes in 
treatment of operating lease assets and Treasury income, as announced on 
13 September 2016. See page 135 for details.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements2

Strategic Report

  4  Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s Statement
  8  Business Model
 12  Strategy and Key Performance Indicators
 14  Financial Overview
 20  Banking
 24  Securities
 26  Asset Management
 28  Principal Risks and Uncertainties
 32  Sustainability Report

Photographed on location at G&H Sheet Fed Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 20163

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements4

Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s Statement

The group has achieved a good 
performance, with adjusted 
operating profit of £234 million 
(2015: £225 million) and strong 
return on opening equity of 
18.9% (2015: 19.5%). We are 
confident that our clear and 
consistent strategy and the 
disciplined implementation of our 
business model will ensure we 
continue to support our clients 
and generate good returns for 
shareholders in a wide range of 
market conditions.

Strone Macpherson, Chairman

Preben Prebensen, Chief Executive

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 20165

Good Performance in More Challenging Conditions
In the UK, the political environment and financial markets 
have been dominated by the EU referendum vote in June. 
The eventual timing and nature of the UK’s exit from the EU 
is still uncertain, and the longer-term impact on consumer 
confidence, SMEs and their appetite to invest, and on the 
wider financial markets is also still uncertain. 

However, our own strategy is clear and unchanged. We 
continue to focus on providing a differentiated and 
relationship driven service in specialist markets, where we 
have long-standing expertise, and on maintaining our 
prudent and consistent underwriting, founded in a deep 
knowledge of the sectors and asset classes we lend in. This 
in turn allows us to generate consistent profitability through 
the cycle, allowing us to support our clients, invest in our 
business and generate returns for our shareholders in all 
market conditions.

Our business is deliberately built for resilience against 
changes in the external environment. The diversity and 
maturity of our funding reduce refinancing risk, and we 
match assets and liabilities which minimises our exposure to 
interest rate and currency movements. Our consistent 
profitability supports our strong and prudent capital position, 
ensuring that we continue to comfortably meet all regulatory 
requirements while maintaining flexibility for future growth.

The strength of our business model has been validated by 
the group’s performance this year, with all our businesses 
responding well to their particular market conditions. 
Adjusted operating profit continued to increase in the 
Banking division, as we generated good loan book growth 
across all our lending businesses, while maintaining the 
discipline of our lending model. Winterflood has traded 
successfully through difficult market conditions in the first 
half, and performance improved significantly in the second, 
notwithstanding the EU referendum which actually stimulated 
more trading activity at the end of the financial year. Although 
adjusted operating profit in Asset Management was 
impacted by the lower market levels in the period, we 
continued to achieve positive net inflows.

Overall, this has resulted in continued profit growth and 
strong returns to our shareholders, with a return on opening 
equity of 18.9% (2015: 19.5%) and supporting our sixth 
consecutive year of dividend increase.

Good Loan Book Growth While Maintaining Discipline
The current benign environment, with low interest rates and 
low impairments, is inevitably attracting more credit into 
some of our markets from both larger banks and newer 
competitors. Despite this, the loan book grew 12% (2015: 
8%), benefiting from good underlying demand across our 
businesses, as well as an increasing contribution from new 
growth initiatives, particularly in Ireland and green energy.

Most importantly, we continue to lend at criteria which are 
consistent with our objective of delivering strong and 
consistent returns through the cycle. Although competition 
has impacted the net interest margin in some parts of our 
business, the return on net loan book remains strong at 
3.6% (2015: 3.7%).

  Our business is deliberately built for 
resilience against changes in external 
market conditions. 

These strong returns are supported by the differentiation of 
our offering, which focuses on providing a high level of 
service and building personal relationships with borrowers 
and intermediaries, and the quality and consistency of our 
underwriting across all the lending businesses. This 
customer focus is strongly endorsed by our borrowers and 
evidenced by our high levels of repeat business and strong 
net promoter scores.

In Retail Finance, our lending is intermediated through a 
network of motor dealers, insurance brokers and retailers, 
who value the personalised service and flexibility of our 
offering, which supports their ability to provide an attractive 
and accessible finance package for their customers. 
Although the market is competitive, the motor finance 
business has continued to grow, benefiting from strong 
underlying demand for second hand cars, and particularly 
from further expansion of our operations in Ireland. We have 
also made significant progress in the premium finance 
business, with increased new business levels, and a number 
of significant new account wins.

In Commercial Finance, we have lending relationships with 
over 20,000 small businesses across the UK. Competition in 
the broker distributed part of the business has increased 
significantly, however we are differentiated through our 
experienced direct sales force, who offer a personalised 
service, and are empowered to make speedy underwriting 
decisions. As a result, we continue to see good new 
business levels particularly in our more specialist lending 
areas.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements6

Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s Statement 
continued

Our specialist Property Finance business, which focuses 
on residential development lending to a small number of 
experienced, professional developers, continues to perform 
very well with good growth and bad debts at an all time low. 
The consistent application of strict underwriting criteria over 
many years supports our long track record of profitability in 
this business and gives us confidence that we can continue 
lending profitably and support our customers in all market 
conditions. 

Navigating Market Headwinds
Financial markets have been challenging throughout the 
year, with headwinds caused by commodity prices and 
concerns about global growth in the first half, and dominated 
by the EU referendum in the second.

Winterflood’s performance in the year has demonstrated its 
ability to trade successfully in a range of market conditions. 
Although performance in the first half was weaker, reflecting 
volatile markets and low risk appetite, trading remained 
consistently profitable. The second half saw a marked 
increase in profits as Winterflood benefited from an 
improvement in retail trading activity, further accelerated by 
the EU referendum vote. Overall, Winterflood achieved a 
good result in these conditions, demonstrating the strength 
of its business model and the long-standing expertise of its 
traders.

Photographed on location at Mark Priestley SDT Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 20167

Although lower market levels have affected the progression 
of income in Asset Management, we have continued to see 
good demand for our products and services, with positive 
net flows despite the increased market uncertainty leading 
up to and post the EU referendum. We remain confident in 
our business model and are focused on driving further 
growth by expanding our adviser force and distribution 
capacity, and where appropriate through the selective 
acquisition of teams or small businesses that fit our strategy 
and approach.

Protecting and Sustaining the Business
We continue to invest in protecting, sustaining and 
developing our proven business model and brand to protect 
our returns and maximise growth opportunities in the long 
term. The strong profitability inherent in our business means 
we can invest through the cycle, and in the past year we 
have progressed a number of key initiatives. At the same 
time we have tightened our focus on cost to ensure cost 
growth has remained in line with revenue for the year overall.

We are continuously exploring new ways to extend our 
business model into new market segments, while 
maintaining the same specialist focus, prudent approach 
and discipline as in our existing businesses. This year we 
launched our new technology leasing business, which 
provides IT financing solutions for corporates, and we are 
continuing to expand our point of sale finance offering to 
retailers. In Asset Management, we have launched Intelligent 
Retirement®, an integrated solution focused on managing the 
changing needs of individuals leading up to and following 
retirement. We are also continuing to develop Winterflood 
Business Services, which provides outsourced trading and 
custody services to institutions.

This year, there has been a significant focus on talent 
management and succession planning. This includes the 
development of detailed succession plans for key positions 
in the Banking division and across the group.

We have a number of programmes in place to attract, 
develop and retain talent at all levels across the organisation. 
The sales training programme in asset finance, which 
launched in September 2015, has been a success with the 
candidates now an active part of the sales force. We 
continue to run a number of successful training programmes 
across the group, including leadership programmes and 
tailored training for our financial advisers.

Although we are principally a people driven business, 
technology plays an important role in supporting and 
sustaining our customer proposition. We continue to put 
significant investment into upgrading and enhancing our IT 
systems, to ensure they are scalable, efficient and secure. 
Current projects include our ongoing investment in the 
premium finance infrastructure, a new deposit system in 
Treasury, and continuing to simplify and optimise our 
infrastructure in Asset Management.

  Our established business model, long 
track record and strong balance sheet 
leave us well placed to continue to 
perform well in a range of market 
conditions. 

Board Changes
Stephen Hodges has informed us of his decision to retire 
and will step down from his position as chief executive of the 
Banking division and a director of the group. Accordingly, he 
will not seek re-election at the forthcoming Annual General 
Meeting (“AGM”) on 17 November. Stephen has been with 
the group for 31 years and a director since 1995. The board 
would like to thank Stephen for his outstanding contribution 
to the group and his leadership of the Banking division over 
many years.

Following the AGM, Preben Prebensen will assume the role 
of chief executive of the Banking division, in addition to his 
current role as group chief executive. Preben’s leadership, 
supported by the strength and depth of the senior team 
within the Banking division, will ensure continued 
implementation of our well-established strategy and business 
performance.

Outlook
Looking ahead, our established business model, long track 
record and strong balance sheet leave us well placed to 
continue to perform well in a range of market conditions.

To date, we have seen little direct impact on our businesses 
from the EU referendum result but we continue to monitor 
developments closely.

Our priority remains to maintain the discipline of our banking 
model. We remain confident in our market position and 
expect continued growth at strong returns, and will continue 
to actively invest in our business while maintaining a strong 
focus on cost control. Winterflood has continued to benefit 
from increased retail investor trading activity since the 
financial year end, but remains sensitive to changes in 
market conditions. In Asset Management, we are focused on 
driving continued growth.

We have had a good start to the year and are confident that 
our business remains well positioned longer term.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements8

Business Model

We call our approach “Modern Merchant Banking”, which reflects 
how we apply our focus on service, expertise and strong 
relationships to meet the evolving needs of our clients. We build 
leading positions within the specialist markets we operate in, 
which in turn generates strong profitability, allowing us to reinvest 
in our business. 

1

Build leading 
positions in our 
specialist markets

Generate strong
and sustainable
returns

Expertise
Our people are 
experts in their fields

Relationships
Building long-term
relationships with clients 
and intermediaries

Service
Allowing us to provide
excellent service

Reinvest in the 
business to enhance 
our customer 
proposition

4

Maintain a sound 
financial position 
and support our 
clients through 
the cycle

2

3

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 20169

We are focused on supporting and developing this business 
model over the long term and ensuring the group is underpinned 
by prudent levels of capital, funding and liquidity.

Maintain a sound  
financial position

Generate strong and 
sustainable returns

Reinvest in our business to 
enhance client experience

Our strong financial resources 
include a simple balance sheet and 
prudent capital position, which 
alongside strong returns allow  
us to pay a progressive dividend 
while continuing to invest in the 
businesses.

We continue to use our expertise to 
maintain leading positions in our 
markets. Each division is a specialist 
in their own niche markets and we 
apply the same conservative 
approach and disciplined focus  
on returns across all of them.

We continuously invest in our 
products, technology and people, 
to deliver a high quality service 
and build on the long-term 
relationships we have with  
our clients. 

•  Our prudent capital position means 
we have the strategic flexibility to 
continue to grow through the cycle 
and meet evolving regulatory 
requirements.

•  Our “borrow long, lend short” 
principle gives confidence to 
creditors and rating agencies.

•  Our diverse funding profile provides 
resilience and flexibility in difficult 
market conditions, so we can 
continue to support our customers 
when they need us.

•  Each of our divisions has a long track 
record of financial performance while 
supporting our clients through the 
cycle, based on long-term 
relationships driven by our customer 
led proposition.

•  We operate consistently through the 

cycle and do not manage our 
businesses to a growth target; our 
priority is always to maintain our 
strong returns.

•  Our embedded and strict 

underwriting criteria, supported by a 
robust governance and control 
framework, ensure we maintain a 
high quality loan book.

•  Lending is predominantly secured, 

with conservative loan to value ratios.

•  Our history of extending the 

business model into new areas 
has helped support continued 
growth over the long term and 
through previous credit cycles.

•  We invest in recruitment and 

training for all levels of employees, 
to deepen and broaden our 
expertise and focus on client 
service.

•  We proactively invest in technology 

to ensure our infrastructure 
remains robust and to improve our 
client offering.

•  Our strong client focus is 

evidenced by high levels of repeat 
business and net promoter scores.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements10

Business Model continued

How we are different

Our Services
We focus on straightforward 
products and services in 
markets we know and 
understand.

The expertise of our people 
allows us to provide flexible 
solutions to meet individual 
client needs.

Banking

The Banking division provides 
specialist finance to UK SMEs and 
individuals, serving over two million 
customers. We have diversified 
funding including customer deposits, 
from businesses and individuals, 
along with wholesale facilities.

Within Commercial Finance, our 
asset finance business provides 
secured specialist finance solutions 
to SMEs, reaching customers both 
directly, through our local expert 

Our Market Position
We are a trusted brand with  
a strong reputation in the 
financial services market.

We have built leading market 
positions in a number of 
specialist areas.

We have a long track record of 
supporting clients in all market 
conditions underpinned by our 
strong financial performance.

We have an established market position 
in each of our niche areas: asset, invoice, 
motor, premium and property finance. 
Our approach generates high levels of 
repeat business through our long-term 
relationships and customer focused values.

We typically operate in markets which 
are underserved by larger banks, 
where our expertise and superior 
customer service are critical. In asset 
finance we work with smaller, family run 
businesses, in motor finance we have 

teams, and via brokers. Invoice finance 
offers both invoice financing and discount 
factoring. Retail Finance partners with 
over 9,000 intermediaries including 
motor dealers and insurance brokers 
to provide lending services to SMEs 
and individuals. In Property Finance, we 
provide specialist residential development 
finance through our long-term relationships 
with professional property developers.

relationships with the independent dealers 
and in Property Finance we generally 
focus on smaller independent developers.

Our Expertise
We understand our specialist 
markets and our clients’ needs, 
ranging from small businesses 
to private investors and retail 
brokers.

Our decentralised model 
enables personal service,  
with extensive local presence 
across the UK.

We have a local presence across the 
UK, with both a direct sales force and 
intermediated distribution network of 
dealers, brokers and retailers. Our highly 
specialist lenders understand their sectors 
and asset classes and have authority 
to underwrite loans, enabling them to 
provide fast and flexible solutions. We 
consistently apply strict lending criteria 
when assessing the credit quality of a 
borrower and maintain conservative loan 
to value ratios across our portfolio.

Our people are core to our business 
and we are committed to providing 
opportunities to maximise their potential 
and develop their career within the group. 
We promote employee engagement 
and provide opportunities for talent 
development and also run a number of 
initiatives including graduate and school 
leaver programmes, as well as a specialist 
sales training academy in asset finance.

Sustainable Income
We focus on recurring income 
streams and manage our 
financial resources carefully.

We apply our strategy 
consistently to support 
sustainable earnings growth.

Our lending income relies on our customer 
led, differentiated local service to attract 
and retain customers. We have high 
levels of repeat business which helps 
support our consistently strong margins.

in renewable energy and technology 
leasing. In each new or adjacent market 
we explore, it must adhere to our strict 
lending criteria, contributing to our high 
quality loan book and strong returns. 

We continuously explore new initiatives 
to drive future growth. Most recently 
these have included expansion 
into Ireland, consumer point of sale 
finance and hiring specialist teams

Read more about Banking  
on pages 20 to 23.

Read more about Securities  

on pages 24 and 25.

Read more about Asset Management 

on pages 26 and 27.

Securities

Asset Management

Winterflood’s core business is 

market-making in the UK to retail 

stockbrokers and institutions, providing 

continuous liquidity in all market 

conditions. It trades in around 15,000 

instruments in the UK and overseas 

and we also have a specialist team 

focused on investment trusts.

Asset Management provides an 

integrated offering directly to private 

clients, combining financial planning 

advice and investment management. 

In addition, we provide our investment 

management offering to third party 

advisers and directly to clients through 

our bespoke portfolio managers.

Winterflood is the leading market-

maker to the UK private client sector, 

serving around 400 clients. Its strong 

market position is driven by its 

ability to provide continuous liquidity 

through our market leading execution 

services supported by our own 

leading electronic trading platform.

We have specialised in advising 

and managing investments for 

many years, tailoring portfolios for a 

range of clients. We continue to win 

awards for our high quality integrated 

proposition, focusing on the needs of 

our clients while continuing to build 

scale organically but also through 

small acquisitions and the hiring of 

advisers and portfolio managers.

Our traders have extensive experience 

Our financial advisers provide award 

of executing orders in a range of 

market conditions enabling us to 

trade successfully over many years. In 

addition, Winterflood has the largest 

dedicated investment trusts team 

in the sector offering trading, sales, 

research and corporate services. 

winning financial planning and 

investment advice tailored to the 

evolving needs of our clients. We offer 

a wide range of investment solutions 

delivered through an experienced 

team covering asset allocation, 

research and portfolio management.

Winterflood’s income is predominantly 

trading income from its market-making 

activities. Its diversified offering, 

alongside embedded risk limits, has 

enabled Winterflood to trade profitably 

in a wide range of market conditions.

Our range of propositions and 

distribution channels provide a  

diverse source of client assets  

and recurring revenues. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016 
 
 
 
 
11

Our Services

We focus on straightforward 

products and services in 

markets we know and 

understand.

The expertise of our people 

allows us to provide flexible 

solutions to meet individual 

client needs.

Banking

The Banking division provides 

specialist finance to UK SMEs and 

individuals, serving over two million 

customers. We have diversified 

funding including customer deposits, 

from businesses and individuals, 

along with wholesale facilities.

Within Commercial Finance, our 

asset finance business provides 

secured specialist finance solutions 

to SMEs, reaching customers both 

directly, through our local expert 

Our Market Position

We are a trusted brand with  

a strong reputation in the 

financial services market.

We have built leading market 

positions in a number of 

specialist areas.

We have a long track record of 

supporting clients in all market 

conditions underpinned by our 

strong financial performance.

We have an established market position 

in each of our niche areas: asset, invoice, 

motor, premium and property finance. 

Our approach generates high levels of 

repeat business through our long-term 

relationships and customer focused values.

We typically operate in markets which 

are underserved by larger banks, 

where our expertise and superior 

customer service are critical. In asset 

finance we work with smaller, family run 

businesses, in motor finance we have 

teams, and via brokers. Invoice finance 

offers both invoice financing and discount 

factoring. Retail Finance partners with 

over 9,000 intermediaries including 

motor dealers and insurance brokers 

to provide lending services to SMEs 

and individuals. In Property Finance, we 

provide specialist residential development 

finance through our long-term relationships 

with professional property developers.

relationships with the independent dealers 

and in Property Finance we generally 

focus on smaller independent developers.

Our Expertise

We understand our specialist 

markets and our clients’ needs, 

ranging from small businesses 

to private investors and retail 

brokers.

Our decentralised model 

enables personal service,  

with extensive local presence 

across the UK.

We have a local presence across the 

UK, with both a direct sales force and 

intermediated distribution network of 

dealers, brokers and retailers. Our highly 

specialist lenders understand their sectors 

and asset classes and have authority 

to underwrite loans, enabling them to 

provide fast and flexible solutions. We 

consistently apply strict lending criteria 

when assessing the credit quality of a 

borrower and maintain conservative loan 

to value ratios across our portfolio.

Our people are core to our business 

and we are committed to providing 

opportunities to maximise their potential 

and develop their career within the group. 

We promote employee engagement 

and provide opportunities for talent 

development and also run a number of 

initiatives including graduate and school 

leaver programmes, as well as a specialist 

sales training academy in asset finance.

Sustainable Income

Our lending income relies on our customer 

in renewable energy and technology 

led, differentiated local service to attract 

and retain customers. We have high 

levels of repeat business which helps 

support our consistently strong margins.

leasing. In each new or adjacent market 

we explore, it must adhere to our strict 

lending criteria, contributing to our high 

quality loan book and strong returns. 

We focus on recurring income 

streams and manage our 

financial resources carefully.

We apply our strategy 

consistently to support 

sustainable earnings growth.

We continuously explore new initiatives 

to drive future growth. Most recently 

these have included expansion 

into Ireland, consumer point of sale 

finance and hiring specialist teams

Securities

Asset Management

Winterflood’s core business is 
market-making in the UK to retail 
stockbrokers and institutions, providing 
continuous liquidity in all market 
conditions. It trades in around 15,000 
instruments in the UK and overseas 
and we also have a specialist team 
focused on investment trusts.

Asset Management provides an 
integrated offering directly to private 
clients, combining financial planning 
advice and investment management. 
In addition, we provide our investment 
management offering to third party 
advisers and directly to clients through 
our bespoke portfolio managers.

Winterflood is the leading market-
maker to the UK private client sector, 
serving around 400 clients. Its strong 
market position is driven by its 
ability to provide continuous liquidity 
through our market leading execution 
services supported by our own 
leading electronic trading platform.

We have specialised in advising 
and managing investments for 
many years, tailoring portfolios for a 
range of clients. We continue to win 
awards for our high quality integrated 
proposition, focusing on the needs of 
our clients while continuing to build 
scale organically but also through 
small acquisitions and the hiring of 
advisers and portfolio managers.

Our traders have extensive experience 
of executing orders in a range of 
market conditions enabling us to 
trade successfully over many years. In 
addition, Winterflood has the largest 
dedicated investment trusts team 
in the sector offering trading, sales, 
research and corporate services. 

Our financial advisers provide award 
winning financial planning and 
investment advice tailored to the 
evolving needs of our clients. We offer 
a wide range of investment solutions 
delivered through an experienced 
team covering asset allocation, 
research and portfolio management.

Winterflood’s income is predominantly 
trading income from its market-making 
activities. Its diversified offering, 
alongside embedded risk limits, has 
enabled Winterflood to trade profitably 
in a wide range of market conditions.

Our range of propositions and 
distribution channels provide a  
diverse source of client assets  
and recurring revenues. 

Read more about Banking  

on pages 20 to 23.

Read more about Securities  
on pages 24 and 25.

Read more about Asset Management 
on pages 26 and 27.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements 
 
 
 
 
12

Strategy and Key Performance Indicators

The effective and consistent application of our strategy, to build 
and sustain strong market positions in specialist markets, while 
providing superior client service, has resulted in good financial 
performance against a backdrop of more challenging market 
conditions.

Strategic objectives

2016 progress

Future objectives

Key risks1

Key performance indicators

Build Market Leading 
Positions
Build strong market positions, 
using our expertise to provide 
excellent client service and 
develop long-term client 
relationships.

Remain Prudent and 
Efficient
Hold an appropriate level of 
capital, funding and liquidity in 
all market conditions.

Develop our Client 
Proposition
Invest in people, technology 
and products and services to 
enhance our client proposition.

Maintain the Strength of our 
Business Model
Consistently apply our high 
quality business model 
throughout the economic 
cycle.

Deliver Attractive 
Shareholder Returns
Generate sustainable 
shareholder returns through 
earnings growth and prudent 
management of our financial 
resources.

•  Grew the loan book to £6.4 billion, while 
maintaining our strict lending criteria and 
strong returns.

•  Focus on delivering excellent service and 
maintaining strong client relationships.

•  Continue to develop our brand and 

•  Continued to leverage our core 

differentiators. 

capabilities in new markets, including our 
technology leasing business within asset 
finance.

•  Winterflood demonstrated the strength 

of its business model despite the 
turbulent market conditions, delivering 
£19 million operating profit.

•  Explore new opportunities to enter niche 
markets, while maintaining our model.
•  Increase scale of client assets through 

organic growth, adviser hiring and small 
acquisitions.

•  Broadly unchanged CET1 ratio at 13.5%, 

•  Regular stress testing of capital position 

•  Changes to regulatory requirements.

Common equity tier 1 

Leverage ratio 

Funding % loan book 

remains ahead of regulatory 
requirements and provides strategic 
flexibility.

•  Maintained strong credit ratings.
•  Successfully completed our first public 
securitisation, providing further diversity 
while maintaining our prudent funding 
position, now at £8.2 billion.

•  Built on the strength of our people, 
including key adviser hires in Asset 
Management and the ongoing training of 
our direct sales force in Commercial 
Finance.

•  Continued investment in technology in 

premium finance and Treasury, ensuring 
our infrastructure remains robust and 
serves our customers effectively.

•  Returns remained strong benefiting from 
the consistent application of our business 
model across the lending businesses.
•  Winterflood continued to trade profitably 
in difficult markets, benefiting from the 
experience of its traders and resilient 
infrastructure.

•  Positive net flows in Asset Management 

despite tough conditions.

•  Dividend up 7% to 57.0p, in line with our 

progressive dividend policy, with 
dividend cover maintained at 2.3 times.

•  Continued strong return on opening 
equity of 18.9%, building on our long 
track record.

•  Total shareholder return while negative 

outperformed vast majority of UK 
banking sector.

to maintain flexibility.

•  Maintain diverse funding sources and a 

prudent maturity profile.

•  Maintain a conservative approach to 
liquidity with a prudent risk appetite.

•  Continue investment in our infrastructure 

to improve resilience and operating 
capabilities.

•  Continued training and support for our 
expert people, who are core to our 
model and delivering on our strategy.
•  Develop delivery channels and services 

to meet evolving client needs.

•  Maintain the disciplined lending criteria 

and customer led approach, to preserve 
the quality of the loan book and continue 
to lend through the cycle.

•  Maximise Winterflood’s profitability in all 

market conditions.

•  Build scale in Asset Management.

•  Build scale across the business while 

maintaining our robust business model.
•  Maintain appropriate dividend cover to 

sustain dividend growth.

•  Continue to engage regularly with 

shareholders and external stakeholders.

•  Lower demand for our products and 

Loan book 

services, impacted by economic and 

£ billion

Winterflood’s income 

Total client assets 

£ million

£ billion

political conditions.

•  Competitive pressures, particularly in 

parts of the Banking division.

•  Loss of staff who are key to 

delivering on our strategy.

2016

2015

2014

6.4 

2016

5.7 

5.3 

2015

2014

82.3 

94.6 

96.1 

2016

2015

2014

9.9 

10.8 

9.7 

•  Changes in market conditions 

resulting in lower availability or higher 

capital 

per cent

cost of funding.

per cent

per cent

13.5 

2016

13.7 

13.1 

2015

2014

10.2 

10.2 

9.2

2016

2015

2014

127 

131 

135 

•  Technology and systems becoming 

Total headcount 

Front office headcount 

Employees satisfied/ 

obsolete.

•  Inability to attract or retain high 

calibre people.

•  Changes to consumer habits or 

market structure.

very satisfied2 

per cent

3,032

2,860 

2,669 

2016

2015

2014

1,057

2015

1,016 

1,008 

2013

2011

•  Competition, leading to pricing 

pressure or narrowing expansion 

opportunities.

•  Higher bad debts due to customer 

inability to service debt.

Return on net loan book 

Adjusted basic earnings 

Net inflows 

per share 

pence

per cent 

3.6 

3.7 

3.7 

2016

2015

2014

128.4  

2016

6 

120.5 

101.0 

2015

2014

88

90 

86 

10 

9 

•  Political and economic uncertainty in 

Group return on opening 

Dividend per share 

Total shareholder return 

pence

per cent

the UK affecting investor and 

customer confidence.

•  Changes to regulation or tax.

18.9 

19.5 

17.9 

2016

2015

2014

57.0 

2016

(10)

53.5 

49.0 

2015

2014

18 

26 

2016

2015

2014

2016

2015

2014

per cent 

2016

20153

2014

equity 

per cent

2016

2015

2014

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016 
13

The discipline of the business model has been maintained across 
the group, with focus on margins, returns and effective 
underwriting processes.

Strategic objectives

2016 progress

Future objectives

Key risks1

Key performance indicators

•  Lower demand for our products and 
services, impacted by economic and 
political conditions.

•  Competitive pressures, particularly in 

parts of the Banking division.
•  Loss of staff who are key to 
delivering on our strategy.

Loan book 
£ billion

Winterflood’s income 
£ million

Total client assets 
£ billion

2016

2015

2014

6.4 

2016

5.7 

5.3 

2015

2014

82.3 

94.6 

96.1 

2016

2015

2014

9.9 

10.8 

9.7 

•  Changes to regulatory requirements.
•  Changes in market conditions 

resulting in lower availability or higher 
cost of funding.

Common equity tier 1 
capital 
per cent

Leverage ratio 
per cent

Funding % loan book 
per cent

2016

2015

2014

13.5 

2016

13.7 

13.1 

2015

2014

10.2 

10.2 

9.2

2016

2015

2014

127 

131 

135 

•  Technology and systems becoming 

Total headcount 

Front office headcount 

Employees satisfied/ 
very satisfied2 
per cent

obsolete.

•  Inability to attract or retain high 

calibre people.

•  Changes to consumer habits or 

market structure.

2016

2015

2014

3,032

2,860 

2,669 

2016

2015

2014

1,057

2015

1,016 

1,008 

2013

2011

•  Competition, leading to pricing 

pressure or narrowing expansion 
opportunities.

•  Higher bad debts due to customer 

inability to service debt.

Return on net loan book 
per cent 

Adjusted basic earnings 
per share 
pence

Net inflows 
per cent 

2016
20153

2014

3.6 

3.7 

3.7 

2016

2015

2014

128.4  

2016

6 

120.5 

101.0 

2015

2014

88

90 

86 

10 

9 

•  Dividend up 7% to 57.0p, in line with our 

•  Build scale across the business while 

•  Political and economic uncertainty in 

the UK affecting investor and 
customer confidence.

•  Changes to regulation or tax.

Group return on opening 
equity 
per cent

Dividend per share 
pence

Total shareholder return 
per cent

2016

2015

2014

18.9 

19.5 

17.9 

2016

2015

2014

57.0 

2016

(10)

53.5 

49.0 

2015

2014

18 

26 

1  Further information on principal risks and uncertainties is provided on pages 28 to 31.
2  Our employee survey is run on a biennial basis, chart shows results from latest three surveys.
3  2015 re-presented for change in treatment of operating lease assets, as announced on 13 September 2016. See page 135 for details.

Build Market Leading 

Positions

•  Grew the loan book to £6.4 billion, while 

•  Focus on delivering excellent service and 

maintaining our strict lending criteria and 

maintaining strong client relationships.

strong returns.

•  Continue to develop our brand and 

•  Continued to leverage our core 

differentiators. 

Build strong market positions, 

using our expertise to provide 

excellent client service and 

develop long-term client 

relationships.

capabilities in new markets, including our 

technology leasing business within asset 

finance.

•  Winterflood demonstrated the strength 

of its business model despite the 

turbulent market conditions, delivering 

£19 million operating profit.

•  Explore new opportunities to enter niche 

markets, while maintaining our model.

•  Increase scale of client assets through 

organic growth, adviser hiring and small 

acquisitions.

Remain Prudent and 

•  Broadly unchanged CET1 ratio at 13.5%, 

•  Regular stress testing of capital position 

remains ahead of regulatory 

to maintain flexibility.

requirements and provides strategic 

•  Maintain diverse funding sources and a 

Efficient

Hold an appropriate level of 

capital, funding and liquidity in 

all market conditions.

flexibility.

•  Maintained strong credit ratings.

•  Successfully completed our first public 

securitisation, providing further diversity 

while maintaining our prudent funding 

position, now at £8.2 billion.

prudent maturity profile.

•  Maintain a conservative approach to 

liquidity with a prudent risk appetite.

Develop our Client 

Proposition

•  Built on the strength of our people, 

including key adviser hires in Asset 

•  Continue investment in our infrastructure 

to improve resilience and operating 

Invest in people, technology 

and products and services to 

enhance our client proposition.

Management and the ongoing training of 

capabilities.

our direct sales force in Commercial 

•  Continued training and support for our 

Finance.

•  Continued investment in technology in 

expert people, who are core to our 

model and delivering on our strategy.

premium finance and Treasury, ensuring 

•  Develop delivery channels and services 

our infrastructure remains robust and 

serves our customers effectively.

to meet evolving client needs.

Maintain the Strength of our 

•  Returns remained strong benefiting from 

•  Maintain the disciplined lending criteria 

the consistent application of our business 

model across the lending businesses.

and customer led approach, to preserve 

the quality of the loan book and continue 

•  Winterflood continued to trade profitably 

to lend through the cycle.

Business Model

Consistently apply our high 

quality business model 

throughout the economic 

cycle.

Deliver Attractive 

Shareholder Returns

Generate sustainable 

shareholder returns through 

earnings growth and prudent 

management of our financial 

resources.

in difficult markets, benefiting from the 

experience of its traders and resilient 

infrastructure.

•  Positive net flows in Asset Management 

despite tough conditions.

progressive dividend policy, with 

dividend cover maintained at 2.3 times.

•  Continued strong return on opening 

equity of 18.9%, building on our long 

track record.

•  Total shareholder return while negative 

outperformed vast majority of UK 

banking sector.

•  Maximise Winterflood’s profitability in all 

market conditions.

•  Build scale in Asset Management.

maintaining our robust business model.

•  Maintain appropriate dividend cover to 

sustain dividend growth.

•  Continue to engage regularly with 

shareholders and external stakeholders.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements 
14

Financial Overview

We have a long track record of 
achieving strong financial 
performance through the cycle, 
underpinned by our simple 
balance sheet, diverse funding 
position and strong and prudent 
capital position.

Photographed on location at G&H Sheet Fed Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016A Good Financial Performance
In 2016 operating income increased 2% to £687.4 million 
(2015: £672.8 million), driven by higher income from the 
Banking division, with good demand across all our lending 
businesses. This was partially offset by lower income in both 
Securities and Asset Management, reflecting the impact of 
more difficult market conditions and one-off items in the prior 
year.

Adjusted operating expenses increased 2% to £415.9 million 
(2015: £406.0 million) as we continue to actively invest to 
support long-term growth. At the same time, we maintain a 
tight focus on cost control across our businesses to balance 
investment and short-term earnings. As a result, the 
expense/income and compensation ratios remained broadly 
stable at 61% (2015: 60%) and 37% (2015: 37%) respectively. 

Overall, this resulted in adjusted operating profit growth of 
4% to £233.6 million (2015: £224.9 million), with the operating 
margin broadly unchanged at 34% (2015: 33%). The Banking 
division accounted for 95% of profits in the period, with 
adjusted operating profit up 7% to £223.0 million (2015: £208.7  
million) supported by a further reduction in impairments. 
Winterflood achieved £19.0 million (2015: £24.6 million) 
operating profit, while Asset Management continued to make 
progress in client assets and delivered adjusted operating 
profit of £14.4 million (2015: £17.8 million). Group net expenses, 
which include the central functions such as finance, legal, 
compliance, risk and HR, reduced to £22.8 million (2015: 
£26.2 million).

Group Income Statement

Operating income
Adjusted operating expenses
Impairment losses on loans and advances

Adjusted operating profit
  Banking
  Securities
  Asset Management
  Group

Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition

Operating profit before tax

Tax
Non-controlling interests

15

The effective tax rate declined from 20.6% to 18.5% 
reflecting the one-off write up of deferred tax assets due to 
the bank corporation tax surcharge which came into effect in 
January 2016. In the 2017 financial year, we expect the 
effective tax rate to increase to around 26% reflecting the full 
year impact of the surcharge.

Adjusted basic earnings per share (“EPS”) increased 7% to 
128.4p (2015: 120.5p), generating a return on opening equity 
of 18.9% (2015: 19.5%). Basic EPS, which includes £5.1 million 
amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition, also increased 
7% to 125.7p (2015: 117.8p) on a continuing basis. 

Results from continuing operations in the comparative year 
exclude the £0.9 million profit after tax and £10.3 million profit 
on disposal in relation to Close Brothers Seydler, our German 
securities business, the sale of which completed in 2015. 
There were no discontinued operations in 2016.

The board has proposed a 7% increase in the final dividend 
to 38.0p (2015: 35.5p), resulting in full year dividend growth 
of 7%. This reflects our progressive dividend policy, while 
ensuring we maintain appropriate cover to deliver sustainable 
dividend growth. Subject to shareholder approval at the 
Annual General Meeting, the dividend will be paid on 
22 November 2016 to shareholders on the register at 
14 October 2016.

2016
£ million
687.4
(415.9)
(37.9)

233.6
223.0
19.0
14.4
(22.8)

20151
£ million
672.8
(406.0)
(41.9)

224.9
208.7
24.6
17.8
(26.2)

(5.1)

(5.0)

228.5

219.9

(42.2)
0.2

(45.4)
–

186.5

174.5

–

11.2

Change
%
2
2
(10)

4
7
(23)
(19)
(13)

2

4

(7)

7

–

7
7
–
7

Profit attributable to shareholders from continuing operations

Profit from discontinued operations, net of tax

Profit attributable to shareholders from continuing and discontinued operations

186.5

185.7

Adjusted basic earnings per share
Basic earnings per share
Basic earnings per share (including discontinued operations)
Dividend per share
Return on opening equity

120.5p
128.4p
117.8p
125.7p
125.4p
125.7p
53.5p
57.0p
18.9% 19.5%

1  Relevant figures and ratios for 2015 are re-presented for changes in treatment of operating lease assets and Treasury income, as announced on 13 September 

2016. See page 135 for details.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements16

Financial Overview continued

Photographed on location at Castle Air Ltd.

Summary Balance Sheet
The overall structure of our high quality and transparent 
balance sheet remains unchanged, and we have maintained 
our prudent capital, funding and liquidity positions. Our 
balance sheet is predominantly made up of loans and 
advances to customers which are short-term in nature (with an 
average maturity of 14 months (31 July 2015: 14 months) and 
around 90% secured); treasury assets held for liquidity 
purposes and settlement balances held within our Securities 
division. Other assets principally comprise intangibles, 
property, plant and equipment and prepayments.

In the year total assets increased to £8.7 billion (31 July 2015: 
£8.0 billion), with 12% growth in the loan book predominantly 
funded by increased customer deposits and borrowings. 
Settlement balances also increased, reflecting higher trading 
activity at Winterflood before the balance sheet date. The 
group’s return on assets was 2.1% (31 July 2015: 2.3%).

Capital
The prudent management of capital is a core element of our 
business model and underpins our ability to grow our 
business while maintaining the confidence of shareholders, 
lenders, regulators and rating agencies. Our strong capital 
position and consistent profitability have allowed us to grow 
the loan book, invest in the business and pay a dividend to 
shareholders over many years.

In the 2016 financial year the common equity tier 1 (“CET1”) 
capital ratio remained broadly unchanged at 13.5% (31 July 
2015: 13.7%), as continued profit generation largely offset an 
increase in risk weighted assets due to loan book growth 
and other balance sheet movements. Overall, CET1 capital 
increased around £90 million to just over £900 million, 
reflecting the increase in retained earnings in the period, 
while risk weighted assets grew to £6.7 billion (31 July 2015: 
£5.9 billion) principally due to higher credit and counterparty 
risk.

The leverage ratio, which is an unweighted measure of 
capital adequacy, remains strong and well ahead of 
regulatory requirements at 10.2% (31 July 2015: 10.2%).

This strong and prudent capital position ensures we continue 
to comfortably meet all regulatory requirements while 
maintaining flexibility for future growth.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Group Balance Sheet

Assets
Loans and advances to customers
Treasury assets1
Market-making assets2
Other assets

Total assets

Liabilities
Deposits by customers
Borrowings
Market-making liabilities2
Other liabilities

Total liabilities

Equity

Total liabilities and equity

1  Treasury assets comprise cash and balances at central banks and debt securities held to support lending in the Banking division.
2  Market-making assets and liabilities comprise settlement balances, long and short trading positions and loans to or from money brokers.

Group Capital Position

Common equity tier 1 capital
Total capital
Risk weighted assets
Common equity tier 1 capital ratio
Total capital ratio
Leverage ratio

17

31 July 
 2016
£ million

31 July 
 2015
£ million

6,431.6
1,048.4
576.9
691.3

5,737.8
1,173.4
481.9
564.2

8,748.2

7,957.3

4,894.6
1,938.3
505.6
312.8

4,481.4
1,792.6
404.3
269.1

7,651.3

6,947.4

1,096.9

1,009.9

8,748.2

7,957.3

31 July 
31 July 
2015 
2016 
£ million
£ million
813.2
901.4
848.0
925.4
5,932.1
6,682.5
13.5% 13.7%
13.8% 14.3%
10.2% 10.2%

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements18

Financial Overview continued

Term funding, with an average maturity of 31 months (31 July 
2015: 31 months), covered two thirds of the loan book as we 
continue to apply our prudent “borrow long, lend short” 
principle.

During the year, both Moody’s Investors Services (“Moody’s”) 
and Fitch Ratings (“Fitch”) reaffirmed our credit ratings. 
Moody’s rates Close Brothers Group (“CBG”) A3/P2 and 
Close Brothers Limited (“CBL”) Aa3/P1, with stable outlooks. 
Fitch rates both CBG and CBL at A/F1 with stable outlooks.

Liquidity
As a group we hold a prudent level of liquidity that is in 
excess of internal and regulatory requirements, and we 
comfortably exceed the minimum level for the Liquidity 
Coverage Ratio requirements under Capital Requirement 
Directive IV which came into force on 1 October 2015.

At 31 July 2016 treasury assets were £1.0 billion (31 July 
2015: £1.2 billion), with the majority held as high quality liquid 
assets, on deposit with the Bank of England. We also place 
surplus funding in certificates of deposit or other liquid 
securities.

Photographed on location at Wastewise Ltd.

Funding
Our Treasury function acts as a cost centre, managing 
funding and liquidity to support the lending businesses. In 
the year we continued to have good access to a wide range 
of funding markets, allowing us to maintain our diverse 
funding position, which includes retail and corporate 
deposits, unsecured bonds, secured funding and other 
wholesale facilities.

Total funding reached £8.2 billion (31 July 2015: £7.5 billion) 
and accounted for 127% (31 July 2015: 131%) of the loan 
book. This primarily reflects an increase in customer deposits 
to £4.9 billion (31 July 2015: £4.5 billion) as well as an 
increase in both secured and unsecured funding to support 
loan book growth. This includes an increase in our 
participation in the Funding for Lending Scheme to £451.0 
million (31 July 2015: £375.0 million).

In June we raised £200 million of funds in a public 
securitisation of our motor finance receivables, further 
diversifying our funding sources.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Group Funding

Deposits
Secured funding
Unsecured funding1
Equity

Total available funding

Of which term funding (>1 year)
Total funding % loan book
Term funding % of loan book
Average maturity of term funding (excluding equity)

19

31 July 
 2016
£ million
4,894.6
1,296.3
866.0
1,096.9

31 July 
 2015
£ million
4,481.4
1,220.8
808.2
1,009.9

8,153.8

7,520.3

4,315.7
127%
67%
31 months

4,018.7
131%
70%
31 months

1  Unsecured funding excludes £21.0 million (2015: £8.6 million) of non-facility overdrafts included in borrowings and includes £245.0 million (2015: £245.0 million) of 

undrawn facilities.

Group Liquidity 

Bank of England deposits
Certificates of deposit
Gilts

Total treasury assets

31 July 
 2016
£ million
847.4
201.0
–

31 July 
 2015
£ million
1,038.0
115.3
20.1

1,048.4

1,173.4

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements20

Banking

The Banking division delivered strong 
growth and returns notwithstanding 
ongoing competition in some of our 
markets. 

Photographed on location at Matsuura Machinery Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201621

Strategy and Market Overview
Our objective of sustainable growth and strong returns is 
supported by our approach to lending, the types of markets 
we choose to operate in and the way we conduct our 
business. We continue to invest in our business and our 
people, expanding our product offering and market reach in 
order to maintain the resilience of the business and support 
long-term growth.

The markets we operate in continue to benefit from the 
benign credit environment, resulting in high levels of 
competition in some areas. However, our consistent and 
personal approach helps us maintain our strong customer 
relationships, lend profitably and grow through the cycle.

Strong Financial Performance 
The loan book growth of 12% (2015: 8%) was driven by 
robust demand and an increasing contribution from new 
initiatives, while maintaining our strict risk and return criteria. 
As a result, the return on net loan book at 3.6% (2015: 3.7%) 
remains ahead of the long-term average of 3.4%.

Operating income grew 6% to £511.2 million (2015: £481.9 
million), with good performance across all lending areas. 
Adjusted operating profit increased 7% to £223.0 million 
(2015: £208.7 million).

The net interest margin reduced to 8.2% (2015: 8.6%) 
principally due to ongoing price competition, especially in 
Commercial Finance, and lower fee income. While it is below 
the prior year, our approach remains consistent with strict 
lending criteria across our businesses and we have 
maintained a strong return on opening equity of 26% (2015: 
27%). 

Adjusted operating expenses increased 8% to £250.3 million 
(2015: £231.3 million) in the Banking division as we continue 
to invest in our IT systems as well as new strategic initiatives 
to support future growth, including our Training Academy in 
asset finance and continued expansion into adjacent 
markets. In the first half expenses increased 11% compared 
to income at 5%, partly reflecting the phasing of investment 
spend. In the second half, cost growth reduced to 5%, while 
income grew at 7% as we tightened cost control without 
impacting spend on key initiatives. This tight focus on cost is 
continuing, while ensuring that we maintain investment to 
maximise opportunities in the long term.

Overall, the expense/income ratio increased to 49% (2015: 
48%), which remains consistent with previous cycles. The 
compensation ratio was broadly stable at 29% (2015: 28%).

The bad debt ratio continued to reduce to 0.6% (2015: 0.7%), 
with all businesses now at or near historical lows, benefiting 
from the benign credit environment and consistent 
application of our prudent underwriting criteria.

Diversified Business Model Driving Loan Book 
Growth 
During the year, the loan book increased 12% to £6.4 billion 
(31 July 2015: £5.7 billion) with strong demand across all our 
businesses and an increased contribution from new 
initiatives.

Retail Finance
Retail Finance provides intermediated finance, principally to 
individuals, through motor dealers, insurance brokers and 
retailers. The Retail Finance loan book increased 11% to £2.5 
billion (31 July 2015: £2.3 billion) with good growth in both 
motor and premium finance. The motor finance loan book 
grew despite a competitive market environment, supported 
by strong underlying demand for second hand cars and 
associated finance. Growth was particularly strong in the 
Irish loan book, which now exceeds £290 million. 

The premium finance book increased 16% to £770.5 million 
(31 July 2015: £665.7 million) driven by robust new business 
levels and greater penetration of existing brokers. We are 
investing to upgrade the IT systems within premium finance, 
which will modernise and simplify the customer experience, 
improve broker interaction and facilitate the future 
development of our business.

Although still small, our new consumer point of sale initiative 
has experienced good growth during the year and we are 
increasing the number of retailers we work with. 

Overall, operating income in Retail Finance increased 10%, 
reflecting loan book growth and the pricing discipline 
embedded in our business model. 

Commercial Finance
Commercial Finance, which focuses on specialist, secured 
lending to the SME market, achieved good growth in the 
period. The loan book increased 13% to £2.5 billion (31 July 
2015: £2.2 billion) as a result of robust new business 
volumes, notwithstanding the competitive environment. 
Growth was particularly strong in more specialist lending 
areas, for example green energy where the loan book now 
exceeds £200 million. 

Overall, the asset finance loan book grew at 13%, with the 
smaller invoice finance book increasing 14% in the period.

Our ongoing investment in growth initiatives includes the 
Training Academy in asset finance, set up to develop the 
next generation of specialist sales representatives. We also 
launched a new technology finance business, specialising in 
leasing IT and other technology equipment to corporate 
clients, which has started operating in the period. 

Operating income in Commercial Finance rose 3%, with a 
higher loan book partly offset by pricing pressure, particularly 
in the broker distributed part of the business. However, 
we have seen good new business from our direct sales 
force, which accounts for over 50% of asset finance 
business, at continued strong margins. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements 
 
22

Banking continued

Property Finance
Property Finance is primarily focused on providing specialist 
residential development finance to well established 
professional developers in the UK. We do not lend to the 
buy-to-let sector, or provide any form of residential or 
commercial mortgages. At this point in the cycle, the 
business is performing very well, with historically low 
impairments and strong growth in profitability as we continue 
to see good demand for core residential development 
finance as well as for shorter-term bridging and 
refurbishment finance.

We have a successful track record of lending profitably and 
continue to apply the same prudent underwriting criteria with 
conservative loan to value ratios of 50% to 60% over a 
short-term period of six to 18 months. We know our  
borrowers well and have long established relationships with 
around 75% repeat business and a deep knowledge of the 
markets we operate in.

Photographed on location at Haynes Ford LTD.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201623

Key Performance Indicators

Net interest margin 
per cent

Bad debt ratio 
per cent

Return on opening equity 
per cent

Return on net loan book 
per cent

2016
20151

2014

8.2

8.6

8.6

2016
20151

2014

0.6

0.7

0.9

2016

2015

2014

26

27

25

2016
20151

2014

3.6

3.7

3.7

Key Financials

Operating income
Retail Finance
Commercial Finance
Property Finance

Adjusted operating expenses
Impairment losses on loans and advances

Adjusted operating profit

2016 
£ million
511.2
204.6
202.3
104.3
(250.3)
(37.9)

20151 

£ million
481.9
186.3
195.9
99.7
(231.3)
(41.9)

Change 
%
6
10
3
5
8
(10)

223.0

208.7

7

Average loan book and operating lease assets

6,226.4

5,629.2

1 

 Relevant figures and ratios for 2015 are re-presented for changes in treatment of operating lease assets and Treasury income, as announced on 13 September 
2016. See page 135 for details.

Loan Book Analysis

Retail Finance
Motor finance
Premium finance
Commercial Finance
Asset finance
Invoice finance
Property Finance

Closing loan book

31 July 
2016 
£ million
2,511.0
1,740.5
770.5
2,463.4
2,035.1
428.3
1,457.2

31 July 
2015 
£ million
2,266.0
1,600.3
665.7
2,172.8
1,796.2
376.6
1,299.0

Change 
%
11
9
16
13
13
14
12

6,431.6

5,737.8

12

In recent years we have expanded our reach into other high 
quality regional locations, where we see attractive growth 
opportunities, while maintaining a strong presence in 
London, the South East and Scotland. Overall, the loan book 
increased 12% in the year to £1.5 billion (31 July 2015: £1.3 
billion), with healthy new business volumes. 

Operating income increased 5% and despite the ongoing 
competitive pressure on fees, we are confident in the quality 
of our loan book and our ability to continue to lend to our 
customers in all market conditions. 

Opportunities for Future Growth at Consistently  
High Margins
Looking ahead we continue to see opportunities for growth 
while maintaining returns and are investing to expand our 
business and distribution capacity into new and existing 
markets. So far we have seen little direct impact on our 
business, and no significant change in customer behaviour, 
following the result of the EU referendum, but we continue to 
monitor developments closely.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements24

Securities

Winterflood has demonstrated the strength 
of its business model by continuing to 
trade successfully despite the turbulent 
market conditions experienced during 
the year. 

Photographed on location at Winterflood Securities Limited.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201625

Key Performance Indicators

Income 
£ million

2016

2015

2014

Bargains per day 
’000

82.3

94.6

96.1

2016

2015

2014

52

60

56

Operating margin 
per cent

2016

2015

2014

23

26

28

Return on opening equity 
per cent

2016

2015

2014

21

26

28

Key Financials

Operating income1
Operating expenses

Operating profit1

2016 
£ million
82.3
(63.3)

2015 
£ million
94.6
(70.0)

Change 
%
(13)
(10)

19.0

24.6

(23)

1  Operating income and operating profit include £3.8 million (2015: £6.8 million) and £1.9 million (2015: £3.5 million) respectively relating to the disposal of Euroclear 

shares.

Strong and Diverse Business Model Continues to  
Deliver
Winterflood provides trading services to retail brokers and 
institutions. By applying our disciplined approach to risk and 
the experience of our traders and our proprietary technology, 
we have a long track record of trading profitably. This allows 
us to provide continuous liquidity in all market conditions and 
maintain our position as the leading UK market-maker.

Winterflood has traded successfully throughout the year 
maintaining its market leading position and delivering £19.0 
million (2015: £24.6 million) operating profit. This includes 
£1.9 million (2015: £3.5 million) from the disposal of the 
remaining holding in Euroclear.

Operating income reduced 13% to £82.3 million (2015: £94.6 
million) reflecting lower trading income across most trading 
sectors but particularly in AIM, which was impacted by  
the significant falls in commodity prices in the first half. 
Performance improved across all sectors in the second half 
with Winterflood successfully navigating the build up and the 
subsequent reaction to the EU referendum vote. 

Average daily bargains decreased 14% to 51,864 (2015: 
60,494), resulting from lower retail investor activity, primarily in 
the first half. However, activity increased in the second half 
and following the EU referendum in late June. There were 
four loss days in the second half, although volatility in the first 
half meant the total number for the full year increased to 17 
(2015: 14) loss days.

Operating expenses decreased 10% as a result of 
Winterflood’s variable cost model. The expense/income and 
compensation ratios increased slightly to 77% (2015: 74%) 
and 48% (2015: 47%) respectively.

Remain Confident
Markets have remained active since the referendum vote, 
although the longer-term outlook remains uncertain. We are 
confident that our diversified and robust business model will 
enable us to remain profitable and provide continuous 
liquidity in a wide range of market conditions.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements26

Asset Management

Photographed on location at Alicat Workboats Ltd.

Although lower market levels have 
impacted the results for the year, we 
remain confident in our long-term strategy, 
and underlying demand for our products 
and services remains solid.

Challenging Conditions Affecting Performance
Asset Management provides an integrated offering directly 
to private clients, combining financial planning advice and 
investment management, through our own advisers. In 
addition, we provide our investment management offering 
to third party advisers and directly to clients through our 
bespoke portfolio managers.

Excluding the corporate business and a one-off gain from 
our former private equity business in the prior year of £4.4 
million, adjusted operating profit was broadly flat at £12.3 
million (2015: £12.7 million).

Total income reduced 3% to £92.3 million (2015: £95.6 
million), reflecting lower markets through much of the year 
and reduced inflows, which impacted recurring income and 
fees. The revenue margin decreased slightly to 86bps (2015: 
88bps). Excluding the corporate business, the underlying 
revenue margin was 91bps (2015: 95bps).

Adjusted operating expenses remained flat at £77.9 million 
(2015: £77.8 million), while the expense/income ratio 
increased slightly to 84% (2015: 81%), as an increase in staff 
costs was offset by the sale of the corporate business. The 
compensation ratio remained broadly stable at 54% (2015: 
53%).

Continued Positive Inflows
Total managed assets remained stable at £8.0 billion (31 July 
2015: £8.0 billion) as net inflows and market movements 
were offset by the disposal of our corporate business. 
Although below the prior year, net inflows remained positive 
at 6%, and market movements benefited from the rise in 
markets at the period end.

Asset Management delivered £14.4 million (2015: £17.8 
million) adjusted operating profit with positive net flows of 
£508 million (31 July 2015: £700 million), or 6% (2015: 10%) 
of opening managed assets. 

Total client assets, which include advised assets under third 
party management, reduced to £9.9 billion (31 July 2015: 
£10.8 billion), principally reflecting the disposal of the 
corporate business.

In the year we disposed of our corporate advice and 
investment management business. These activities included 
£682 million advised assets and £653 million managed 
assets at the time of disposal and contributed £3.1 million 
(2015: £5.8 million) income and £2.1 million (2015: £0.7 
million) operating profit for the year, including a £1.7 million 
profit on disposal.

Our investment strategy is intended to deliver long-term 
returns with a prudent investment approach, tailored 
to individual clients’ risk profiles. Although short-term 
performance has been affected by recent volatile markets, 
at the financial year end the majority of our funds and 
bespoke strategies were ranked first or second quartile over 
three years.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201627

Key Performance Indicators

Total client assets 
£ billion

Revenue margin 
bps

Operating margin 
per cent

Return on opening equity 
per cent

2016

2015

2014

9.9

10.8

9.7

2016

2015

2014

86

88

89

2016

2015

2014

16

19

12

2016

2015

2014

25

25

39

Key Financials

Investment management
Advice and other services
Other income
Operating income
Adjusted operating expenses

Adjusted operating profit

Movement in Client Assets

Opening managed assets
Inflows
Outflows
Net inflows
Market movements
Disposals
Total managed assets
Advised only assets

Total client assets1

Net flows as % of opening managed assets 

1  Total client assets include £3.0 billion (31 July 2015: £2.7 billion) of assets that are both advised and managed.

2016 
£ million
57.4
32.1
2.8
92.3
(77.9)

2015 
£ million
54.1
36.1
5.4
95.6
(77.8)

Change 
%
6
(11)
(48)
(3)
–

14.4

17.8

(19)

31 July 
2016 
£ million
7,996
1,238
(730)
508
196
(653)
8,047
1,854

31 July 
2015 
£ million
6,922
1,477
(777)
700
374
–
7,996
2,797

9,901

10,793

6%

10%

Continue Our Growth Strategy
We continue to execute our growth strategy to progress our 
core business through organic inflows, hiring of key advisers 
and small acquisitions.

During the year we agreed the acquisition of a high net worth 
independent financial advisory business based in London 
which will add around £350 million of advised assets and 
600 clients, and is expected to complete in the first half of 
2017. This is consistent with our strategy to support organic 
growth with small acquisitions, where we see a good cultural 
fit and low integration risk.

Following the year end we have entered into an agreement 
regarding the sale of OLIM Investment Managers, which will 
further increase our focus on our core integrated wealth 
management offering. The disposal represented around 
£490 million of managed assets at 31 July 2016, and 
contributed income of £2.5 million and adjusted operating 
profit of £0.9 million in the 2016 financial year.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements28

Principal Risks and Uncertainties

The group faces a number of risks in the normal course of 
business providing a range of financial services to small 
businesses and individuals. The group seeks to manage 
these risks by:
•  Adhering to our established and proven business model 

This summary should not be regarded as a complete and 
comprehensive statement of all potential risks and 
uncertainties faced by the group but rather those risks which 
the group currently believes may have a significant impact on 
its performance and future prospects.

outlined on pages 8 to 11;

•  Implementing an integrated risk management approach 

based on the concept of “three lines of defence” which is 
outlined in detail on pages 51 and 52; and

•  Setting clearly defined risk appetites monitored with clearly 

UK Referendum on EU Membership
Following the outcome of the UK referendum there is likely to 
be an extended period of uncertainty as the UK negotiates 
its exit from the EU.

defined metrics within set limits.

A summary of the principal risks and uncertainties which 
may impact the group’s ability to deliver its strategy, how we 
seek to mitigate these risks and the change in the perceived 
level of risk over the year is set out below. The list of risks and 
uncertainties is unchanged from the prior year reflecting the 
group’s consistent strategy and approach.

As a predominantly UK lender we expect the direct impact 
on the group to be relatively limited. However the overall 
impact on the group and its customers of the expected 
prolonged period of uncertainty is difficult to predict. 
Therefore while the outcome of the referendum vote is not 
considered a principal risk for the group in itself, we believe 
a number of the principal risks and uncertainties have 
increased relative to the prior year as outlined below.

Key: 

  No change 

  Risk decreased 

  Risk increased

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Credit losses
At 31 July 2016 the group had
loans and advances to 
customers totalling £6.4 
billion. The group is exposed 
to credit losses if customers 
are unable to repay loans and 
outstanding interest and fees.

In addition the group has exposure 
to counterparties with which it 
places deposits or trades, and also 
has a small number of derivative 
contracts to hedge interest rate 
and foreign exchange exposures.

We seek to minimise our exposure to 
credit losses from our lending by:
•  Applying strict lending criteria when 

testing the credit quality and covenant of 
the borrower;

•  Maintaining consistent and conservative 
loan to value ratios with low average loan 
size and short-term tenor;

•  Lending on a predominantly secured 

basis against identifiable and accessible 
assets;

•  Maintaining rigorous and timely 

collections and arrears management 
processes; and

•  Operating strong control and 

governance both within our lending 
businesses and with oversight by a 
central credit risk team.

Our exposures to counterparties are 
mitigated by:
•  Conservative management of our 
liquidity requirements and surplus 
funding with £0.8 billion placed with the 
Bank of England;

•  Continuous monitoring of credit quality 
of our counterparties within approved 
set limits; and

•  Winterflood’s trading relating to 

exchange traded cash securities and 
being settled on a delivery against 
payment basis. Counterparty exposure 
and settlement failure monitoring 
controls are also in place.

The loan impairment rate has 
remained low reflecting our 
lending discipline as well as 
favourable market conditions.

The group’s other counterparty 
exposures are broadly unchanged 
with the majority of our liquidity 
requirements and surplus funding 
placed with the Bank of England.

However, we believe the 
heightened uncertainty for the UK 
economy following the referendum 
vote has increased the potential 
risk of higher credit losses.

Further commentary on the 
credit quality of our loan book 
is outlined on pages 21 to 23. 
Further details on loans and 
advances to customers and debt 
securities held are in notes 11 
and 12 on pages 106 and 107 
of the Financial Statements.

Our approach to credit risk 
management and monitoring is  
outlined in more detail in note 28  
on page 128.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201629

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Economic environment
Any downturn in economic 
conditions may impact the 
group’s performance through:
•  Lower demand for the group’s 

products and services;

•  Lower investor risk appetite as a 

result of financial markets 
instability;

•  Higher bad debts as a result of 
customers inability to service 
debt and lower asset values on 
which loans are secured; and
•  Increased volatility in funding 

markets.

Legal and regulatory
Changes to the existing legal, 
regulatory and tax environments 
and failure to comply with 
existing requirements may 
materially impact the group.

Failing to treat customers fairly, 
to safeguard client assets or to 
provide advice and products which 
are in clients’ best interests has the 
potential to damage our reputation 
and may lead to legal or regulatory 
sanctions including litigation and 
customer redress. This applies to 
current, past and future business.

Similarly changes to regulation 
and taxation can impact our 
performance, capital and 
liquidity and the markets 
in which we operate.

Competition
The group operates in highly 
competitive markets and we 
expect to see continued high 
levels of competition particularly 
in the Banking division.

The majority of the group’s activities are 
in specialist areas where our people have 
significant experience and expertise. Our 
long-standing commitment to our proven 
business model and strong financial 
position has enabled us to support 
our clients in all economic conditions. 
This assists us in our aim of developing 
long-term relationships with our clients.

The group carries out regular stress 
testing on its performance and financial 
positions to test resilience in the event 
of adverse economic conditions.

The group seeks to manage these risks by:
•  Commitment to provide straightforward 
and transparent products and services 
to our clients;

•  Governance and control processes to 
review and approve new products and 
services;

•  Significant investment in both staff and 

operating systems to ensure the group is 
well placed to respond to changes in 
regulation;

•  Investment in training for all staff 

including anti-money laundering, bribery 
and corruption, data protection and 
information security. Additional tailored 
training for relevant employees is 
provided in key areas such as complaint 
handling;

•  Continuous monitoring of key legal, 
regulatory and tax developments to 
anticipate their potential impact; and
•  Maintaining constructive and positive 

relationships and dialogue with 
regulatory bodies and tax authorities.

The group has a long track record 
of trading successfully in all types 
of competitive environment.

We value our clients and build 
long-term relationships offering a 
differentiated proposition based on:
•  Speed and flexibility of service;
•  Local presence;
•  Experienced and expert people; and
•  Tailored, client driven product offerings.

While the performance of the UK  
economy has been resilient, a 
period of prolonged uncertainty  
is likely following the UK 
referendum vote.

Further commentary on the 
attributes and resilience of 
the group’s business model 
is shown on pages 8 to 11.

While financial services businesses 
remain subject to significant 
scrutiny, we believe the risks are 
unchanged from the prior year.

Further information on our 
approach to conduct risk can 
be found in the Sustainability 
Report on page 35.

We continue to experience high 
levels of competition across 
each of our business areas.

Further commentary on the 
market environment for the 
Banking division is outlined on 
page 21. Our business model 
is set out on pages 8 to 11.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements30

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Technology
Maintaining robust and secure 
IT infrastructure, systems and 
software is fundamental to allow 
the group to operate effectively, 
respond to new technology, protect 
client and company data and 
counter the evolving cyber threat.

The group continues to invest in its IT 
infrastructure, information security and 
software as well as our technology teams 
to ensure we maximise the benefits of 
our investment across the group. We 
also continue to invest strategically in 
cyber defence processes and tools, 
customer experience improvements and 
further strengthening of core systems.

Failure to keep up with changing 
customer expectations or 
manage upgrades to existing 
technology has the potential to 
impact group performance.

The group has strong governance in 
place to oversee its major projects.

We have in place business continuity, 
crisis management and disaster recovery 
plans which are regularly tested.

Employees
The calibre, quality and expertise 
of employees is critical to the 
success of the group. The loss 
of key individuals or teams 
may have an adverse impact 
on the group’s operations and 
ability to deliver its strategy.

Funding
The Banking division’s access 
to stable funding remains key to 
support its lending activities and the 
liquidity requirements of the group.

The group seeks to attract, retain and  
develop staff by:
•  Operating remuneration structures 

which are competitive and recognise 
and reward performance;

•  Implementing succession planning for 

key roles;

•  Improving our talent pipeline via our 

graduate and school leavers 
programmes, and training academy in 
asset finance;

•  Investing in training and development for 

all staff; and

•  Delivering leadership development 

programmes to develop current and 
future leaders for the group.

At 31 July 2016 the group’s funding 
position was strong with total available 
funding equal to 127% of the loan 
book. This provides a prudent level of 
liquidity to support our lending activities. 
The group’s funding and liquidity 
positions were prudently positioned 
ahead of the UK referendum vote.

Our funding is well diversified 
both by source, type and tenor. 
Liquidity in our Banking division is 
assessed on a daily basis to ensure 
adequate liquidity is held and readily 
accessible in stressed conditions.

Our funding approach is conservative 
based on the principle of “borrow 
long, lend short”. Over half of our total 
funding is repayable after more than 
one year with an average duration of 31 
months. This compares to our weighted 
average loan maturity of 14 months.

The group continues to invest 
and upgrade its IT infrastructure 
to simplify our technology 
architecture and reduce exposure 
to cyber attack. However, the 
risk of cyber threats or new 
technology impacting our 
business model remains.

For further information on our 
response to cyber threats 
see page 54 of the Corporate 
Governance report.

Our highly skilled people are likely 
to be targeted but we are  
confident we are able to retain 
key employees.

Further detail on the employee 
survey and our investment in 
our people is outlined in the 
Sustainability Report on pages 
33 to 35.

We have further diversified our 
funding during the year with 
our first public securitisation. 
The diversity of funding 
combined with relatively long 
tenor when compared to the 
average duration of our lending 
means we are well placed.

While economic uncertainty has 
the potential to impact funding 
markets, overall the group remains 
well funded and continues to 
have good access to a wider 
range of funding sources.

Further commentary on funding 
and liquidity is provided on 
pages 18 and 19. Further 
financial analysis of our funding 
is shown in note 19 on page 113 
of the Financial Statements.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201631

Risk

Mitigation

Change

The group’s approach and the 
underlying risks are unchanged.

Further detail on the group’s 
exposure to market risk is outlined 
in note 28 on pages 131 and 132 
of the Financial Statements.

Market exposure
Market volatility and/or changes 
in interest and exchange rates 
have the potential to impact 
the group’s performance.

Although the majority of the group’s 
activities are carried out in the 
UK, there is foreign exchange 
exposure on deposits, lending 
and funding balances as part of 
our banking activities as well as 
trading in foreign securities.

Winterflood primarily acts as a market-
maker in a broad range of exchange 
traded cash securities reducing exposure 
to market volatility. In addition trading 
positions are monitored on a real time 
basis and both individual and trading 
book limits are set to control exposure.

The group matches fixed and variable 
interest rate assets and liabilities both 
naturally, and using swaps where 
appropriate. The sensitivity analysis on 
interest rate exposures shown in note 28 
on page 131 shows the expected impact 
of interest rate changes. The group’s 
capital and reserves are not hedged.

Foreign exchange exposures in the 
Banking division are hedged using 
foreign exchange forwards or currency 
swaps with exposures monitored 
daily against approved limits. Trading 
exposures on foreign securities are 
also hedged and monitored against 
limits. The group does not speculate 
on foreign currency movements.

Stress tests are regularly performed 
on market risks to ensure we maintain 
adequate liquidity and capital even 
under extreme downside scenarios.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements32

Sustainability Report

At Close Brothers, we are proud of our 
long-standing reputation built on our 
conservative business model, prudent 
underwriting, continuous support of our 
clients and our dedicated and motivated 
workforce. We want to continue to make 
a positive impact on all our stakeholders 
by concentrating on areas which matter 
to them and where we can make the 
most difference. 

Photographed on location at Barfoots of Botley Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201633

Strong Commitment to our Stakeholders
The group remains committed to acting responsibly, ethically 
and with integrity in our interaction with clients and staff, our 
role in the community and our environmental footprint.
The management of sustainability issues is embedded in our 
business and supported by relevant risk policies and 
management oversight, with updates on employee and 
responsible finance matters regularly appearing on group 
and divisional risk committee agendas.

Over the year, we introduced a number of new initiatives 
aimed at improving customer experience and staff 
development, while continuing to reduce our environmental 
impact and supporting wider communities.

Our Employees
We believe that our staff are fundamental to our business 
and we are committed to building a culture where people 
strive to perform, where they feel inspired to make a 
difference and are well rewarded for their contribution.

We listen and value the feedback we get from employees 
and use it to work together to create a better workplace with 
continued improvements and increased performance across 
the whole business. We have implemented a number of 
initiatives to support the ongoing engagement and 
development of our staff, as well as making us attractive in 
the external market.

Engaging our people
We track the engagement of our staff through our group-
wide employee engagement survey, which is run every two 
years, and due to be run again at the end of the calendar 
year. Our last set of survey results, which were released in 
early 2015, were particularly strong, with 88% of employees 
surveyed indicating that they were satisfied working for Close 
Brothers, and we also had a high overall response rate of 
87%.

Despite being proud of these results, we are not complacent, 
with all our executive teams having set and committed to 
action plans for their divisions. These action plans focused 
not only on what we could improve, but on maintaining the 
areas where we scored highly, to ensure that we maintain 
those standards and continue to build on our strengths. The 
action plans are supported by local plans and activities, and 
their progress has been tracked with local pulse surveys and 
focus groups over the past 18 months.

Developing our people
We are committed to providing opportunities for our people 
to fully realise their potential and develop their career within 
Close Brothers. Earlier this year we implemented a new 
recruitment system which has facilitated the promotion of 
internal vacancies across the group. 

We have a wide selection of internal courses to support 
personal skills development. All employees are encouraged 
to undertake formal training and on average have completed 
over seven continuing professional development hours over 
the past year. However, our learning ethos looks beyond just 
providing courses and places value on experiential and 
on-the-job learning, ensuring continuous learning 
opportunities through experience and through others. All our 
Banking division staff will soon have access to a new online 
learning portal, which will provide access to a library of online 
courses covering a wide range of technical and personal 
skills. 

Individual development is further supported through both 
group-wide and local mentoring schemes, which provide 
individuals with an opportunity to build relationships outside 
of their immediate remit, and obtain support in navigating 
their development journey.

We have introduced a number of programmes to develop 
our pipeline of up and coming talent. Our ASPIRE school 
leavers programme is a two year rotational scheme that has 
been running successfully since 2013, giving school leavers 
the opportunity to kick-start their career in a professional, 
challenging and fast-paced environment. We also provide full 
sponsorship for the Professional Certificate in Banking 
through the Institute of Financial Services alongside 
developing on-the-job experience. Our graduate programme 
provides an opportunity for new graduates to join functional 
business teams and obtain practical, on-the-job training as 
well as additional mentoring support and an opportunity to 
study towards a relevant professional qualification to support 
their career development. 

To develop our next generation of professionals within asset 
finance, the Training Academy was launched in September 
2015. The first intake is focused on sales and provides the 
30 candidates with two years of classroom and field based 
training, along with mentoring from some of our experienced 
sales managers. In addition, Close Brothers Asset 
Management launched their Adviser Academy this year, to 
develop skills and provide career advancement opportunities 
for our financial advisers. Following the success of the first 
cohort, the programme will now be rolled out to all existing 
advisers. 

We have a robust process in place for monitoring our key 
internal talent and identifying succession plans for key and 
critical roles. Talent conversations are held within functions 
and businesses to ensure we have a clear picture of our 
upcoming talent pipeline, and succession plans for key roles 
are reported to the board annually. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements34

Sustainability Report continued

Currently around 40% of our employees are participating 
in at least one of these schemes.

Diversity and equality
Diversity is a key focus of the board and executive 
committees, and we continuously endeavour to make 
Close Brothers appealing to a diverse population. Our 
Equal Opportunity and Dignity at Work policy is in place 
to ensure equal, respectful and dignified treatment 
throughout our recruitment process and through all 
stages of the employee lifecycle. We are committed to 
supporting all individuals in realising their full potential and 
contributing to our company’s success irrespective of 
gender, race, age, disability, sexual orientation or religion, 
and will not tolerate harassment or discrimination of 
employees in any form.

Our last employee survey reported that 88% of staff 
across the group who took part in the survey believe that 
Close Brothers treats their employees fairly regardless of 
gender, ethnicity or for any other diversity reasons.

We regularly monitor and report on our diversity metrics, 
and share this with our senior leadership teams. Our 
workforce is made up of 44% females, 23% of our 
employees are under 30 years old, and 15% are over 50. 
Our board and executive committee each have three 
female members, meaning we already meet the new 
recommended voluntary target for FTSE 350 companies, 
set out in the “Women on Boards Davies Review” to have 
a minimum of 33% female directors by 2020. In this five 
year summary of progress into improving gender balance 
on British boards, published in October 2015, our board 
was ranked equal 17th in the FTSE 250 in terms of 
gender diversity, with a female representation of 33% 
compared to the average female representation on FTSE 
250 boards of 20%.

Photographed on location at G&H Sheet Fed Ltd.

Our Emerging Leaders Programme is an opportunity for 
our pool of future leaders to build a network, receive 
constructive feedback and focus on their development in 
a safe and supportive environment. This successful 
programme has just completed its fourth cohort in  
July 2016.

Remuneration and benefits
As part of our commitment to continuously improve our 
employee proposition, last year we conducted a 
comprehensive review of our benefits package across 
the group and have introduced some new and enhanced 
benefits to further support our people in the areas that 
are most important to them. These include their 
wellbeing, work-life balance as well as options around 
saving for the future.

The new offering includes the opportunity to purchase 
additional holiday, a further enhancement of our maternity 
and adoption leave, introduction of shared parental leave, 
and a back up care scheme for child and elderly care, as 
well as the introduction of a low-emission car salary 
sacrifice scheme. This is in addition to the benefits that 
were already in place, which included a group-wide 
company pension scheme, life insurance and private 
medical insurance, childcare vouchers, a staff discount 
scheme, a cycle to work scheme and interest free 
season ticket loans.

To support our staff with saving for the future, we offer a 
Save As You Earn scheme, intended to encourage saving 
and build long-term share ownership, as well as a Buy As 
You Earn share incentive plan allowing employees to 
acquire shares on a monthly basis out of pre-tax earnings. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Gender Diversity

Number of board directors1
Number of directors of subsidiaries2
Number of senior employees, other than board directors3
Number of employees, other than board directors and senior employees

Includes non-executive directors, excluded from group headcount calculations.
Includes subsidiary directors who are excluded from group headcount calculations.

1 
2 
3  Senior employees indentified as Material Risk Takers who are not directors or subsidiary directors.

35

Male
6
60
17
1,614

Female
3
8
8
1,329

Our strategy to promote a diverse workforce is focused on 
building a genuinely meritocratic culture. We examine all 
areas and build our diversity focus into all our people related 
activities, including compensation review, talent and 
succession planning, leadership programmes, the 
development of our benefits package, recruitment, training 
and development.

Some of the initiatives that we have introduced to support 
diversity include:
•  Working with our leadership teams to raise awareness 
about unconscious bias and about the benefits of 
supporting female talent and making our organisation 
appealing to a more diverse population.

•  Further enhancing maternity and adoption leave, and 

introducing enhanced shared parental leave to the same 
level to allow more flexibility in caring for young children.
•  Introducing an emergency back up care benefit for staff, 
allowing access to a network of childcare and eldercare 
providers when normal care arrangements fail.

•  Promoting flexible working where possible.
•  Ensuring a consistent and clear tone from the top on our 
approach to diversity. Our chief executive is a member of 
the 30% Club, an organisation focused on promoting good 
gender balance at all levels in organisations.

•  Introducing a new recruitment system which allows us to 
monitor the diversity of job applicants, so that we can 
ensure we are attracting potential candidates from a 
variety of backgrounds.

Our Customers
Our reputation as a leading merchant banking group is built 
on our strong culture and persistent focus on our customers 
and their needs. We continuously strive to improve the 
customer experience across all our businesses and maintain 
the highest standards in all our dealings with clients. Over the 
year we have made particular improvements around data 
protection and cyber security and introduced “Customer 
Experience” and “Operational Excellence” programmes 
within our Banking division. These are focused on delivery of 
the right technologies and services for our customers, 
supported by streamlined and simplified operational 
processes.

Responsible finance
We have a wide range of policies in place across all our 
divisions to ensure that our staff and management are aware 
of their responsibilities towards our customers and comply 
with all regulatory requirements. We promote best practice 
and strict compliance with relevant rules and regulations 
supported by a range of compulsory training programmes 
for all employees. The relevant policies include:

Conduct risk and treating customers fairly
The conduct risk framework has been enhanced, and a 
greater range of risk indicators are being used in the 
production of monthly management information. This gives 
senior management a broader view of conduct related 
behaviours and demonstrates that conduct risk is well 
embedded within the culture of Close Brothers.

Anti-money laundering regulations
We have implemented policies and procedures in 
accordance with anti-money laundering regulations and have 
dedicated money laundering reporting officers where 
required.

Whistle-blowing policy
Our whistle-blowing procedure has been enhanced ahead of 
the new rules which came into effect in September 2016, 
with the appointment of a Whistle-blowers’ champion. We 
have also introduced a confidential telephone whistle-
blowing service, operated by a third party provider. Additional 
training has been rolled out across the group ensuring that 
staff are aware of the new enhanced process.

Anti-bribery and corruption policy
Our anti-bribery and corruption policy sets out the group 
standards and best practice for business conduct under the 
Bribery Act 2010.

Privacy policy
Our privacy policy ensures the protection and correct 
treatment of client data in accordance with the Data 
Protection Act 1998.

Health and safety policy
Our health and safety policy ensures the provision of a safe 
and healthy working environment for our employees and 
visitors in accordance with The Management of Health and 
Safety at Work Regulations 1999.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements36

Sustainability Report continued

Photographed on location at JAH Plant Hire Ltd.

During the year we implemented a new risk assessment 
process that gives us full oversight of health and safety 
risk management across the business, ensuring 
compliance with appropriate legislation.

Additional firm wide policies are in place to ensure the 
highest standards in all our dealings with clients and 
other stakeholders:

Complaints handling
We take all complaints seriously, with each division 
monitoring customer complaints to ensure they are dealt 
with efficiently and promptly, with action taken to prevent 
future recurrence.

Customer data and privacy
During the year we have conducted the first group-wide 
audit of data protection, which will be conducted on a 
biennial basis.

We constantly monitor and enhance our systems and 
controls to ensure that our clients are safeguarded 
against system failure or cyber attack. We are now an 
active member of GCHQ’s Cyber Information Sharing 
Partnership. The partnership provides early warning and 
allows intelligence sharing across the industry.

Human rights and Modern Slavery Act
The board gives due regard to human rights 
considerations, as defined under the European 
Convention on Human Rights and the UK Human Rights 
Act 1998.

We are aware of our responsibilities and obligations 
under the Modern Slavery Act and are in the process of 
implementing the systems and controls ensuring 
compliance on a group level.

Customer experience
Our customers are fundamental to our business and we 
constantly monitor ways to improve their experience of 
doing business with us. This strong focus on our 
customers is evidenced by high levels of repeat business 
and net promoter scores (“NPS”). We use the industry 
standard NPS measure to assess the customer satisfaction 
and loyalty across most of our businesses. The NPS 
ranges from -100 to +100, depending on how likely 
customers are to recommend our company. Our scores 
continue to remain at strong levels relative to the wider 
banking sector, with asset, motor and Treasury all achieving 
a score of +50 or above.

During the year, we have set up “Customer Experience” 
and “Operational Excellence” programmes within the 
Banking division, as tools that will allow us to anticipate 
the rapidly changing needs of our customers and to 
develop new services to meet those needs. These new 
initiatives have been designed to create and embed a 
culture of continuous improvement, which encourages 
collaborative working across businesses. This approach 
will help us to better understand our customers, and to 
identify opportunities to improve the way we operate 
across all business processes which will enhance the 
overall customer experience.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201637

We continue to run customer forums at both a divisional and 
business unit level, which are designed to ensure that we 
continue to offer our customers consistently high quality 
experiences and outcomes. Within our Banking division, the 
seven separate forums focus on five key customer principles, 
which define their scope and objectives:
•  We seek to ensure the right outcomes for our customers.
•  We endeavour to ensure our pricing is fair and appropriate.
•  We are clear and consistent in the way we communicate 

with customers.

•  We expect our standards to be upheld by our partners.
•  We are responsible lenders and deposit takers.

Alongside the customer forums, direct feedback is regularly 
collected via customer and staff surveys, targeted research, 
complaints analysis and mystery shopping exercises.

We want to ensure that the complaint handling process is 
as fair as possible providing a single point of contact 
whenever possible and we continuously review and improve 
our processes to deliver fast and satisfactory outcomes for 
customers. We have policies and training in place to ensure 
our staff can identify vulnerable customers and that they are 
treated fairly in our interaction with them.

The strong focus on our customers is further reflected in the 
following awards won during the year: The 2016 Best 
Business Award for our asset finance business; Best 
Factoring & Invoice Discounting Provider for invoice finance; 
and Best Business Motor Finance Provider for our motor 
finance business.

Our Communities
At Close Brothers, we strive to make a positive contribution 
to the communities we operate in. We have invested in a 
number of community based initiatives across the group and 
encourage our employees to get involved with a range of 
initiatives that matter to them.

The Close Brothers SME Apprentice Programme continued 
the success of its first year by launching phase two in 2016. 
Last year, we piloted this unique scheme, by contributing to 
the funding of 20 new apprentices in the Sheffield area. We 
are proud to support a further 20 this year, in the 
Birmingham area. With the skills gap weighing heavily on the 
UK manufacturing sector, the scheme helps SMEs to tackle 
the issues of cost and red tape so they can take on an 
apprentice and invest in a new generation of skilled workers. 
The programme runs in partnership with the Manufacturing 
Technologies Association and manufacturing training centres 
AMRC and EEF.

Our Trustee Leadership Programme, launched in 2014 by 
our Asset Management division in partnership with social 
enterprise Cause 4, was developed to give young 
professionals the skills and confidence to take on a board 
level role within a charity. This is a fulfilling and career 
enriching opportunity for the individuals, while also providing 

the charities themselves with a fresh and diverse pool of 
potential board members. The programme is open to Close 
Brothers employees as well as to external professionals. To 
date, 297 delegates have completed the programme, and 91 
of those have since been matched with board positions 
within charitable organisations. Following the success of the 
London-based programme, a second programme is being 
launched in Manchester later this year.

In addition to group-wide community activities, many of our 
local businesses are involved in their regional communities. 
From supporting a local primary school in helping children 
learn to read, to running a beer festival to support a local 
hospital, we encourage our people to use their strengths to 
support their local communities and get involved in initiatives 
that matter to them.

The group Corporate Social Responsibility (“CSR”) 
Committee is chaired by our group head of human resources 
and supported by employees across the group; we also 
have a number of local CSR committees which run initiatives 
to raise funds for charity.

Charitable Activities
The group’s charitable donations have continued to increase 
and we contributed a total of £278,392 during the 2016 
financial year, which is a 6% increase on 2015.

For the past four years, we have partnered with Cancer 
Research UK, which remains the staff’s chosen charity. 
Every year, we run a group-wide charity week, and in 2016, 
we are very proud to say that we held our most successful 
charity week ever, donating over £74,000 to Cancer 
Research UK, more than double the amount raised in the 
prior year. The week consisted of a number of locally 
organised events for staff, as well as some group-wide 
initiatives, and resulted in Close Brothers receiving a Flame of 
Hope Special Commendation Award from Cancer Research 
UK in their corporate fundraising category.

Our Close Brothers Matched Giving Scheme encourages 
staff to fundraise and volunteer for the charities they support 
by matching 50% of funds raised, or donating £8 per hour of 
voluntary time given by employees. We also match funds 
raised by other local, organised fundraising activities, 
encouraging employees to work together to raise money for 
causes that are close to their hearts. This financial year we 
matched over £69,000.

In addition, we match contributions under our Payroll Giving 
scheme, which allows employee donations to be made 
directly from pre-tax salary. Over 14% of employees across 
the group are signed up to Payroll Giving, allowing us to 
maintain our Payroll Giving Quality Mark Gold Award for the 
sixth consecutive year. Each of our divisions individually hold 
either Platinum or Gold awards, with participation ranging 
from 14% to over 20% across the divisions.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements38

Sustainability Report continued

Waste reduction and recycling
We continue to reduce water and paper usage across all 
our offices by encouraging secure and duplex printing, 
and monitor waste reduction via a third party provider. 
Waste recycling is encouraged in all our offices, and in 
2016 at our head office, we avoided 238 cubic metres of 
landfill and saved 314 trees.

We also encourage our employees to reduce their 
individual environmental impact by offering a cycle to 
work scheme and by providing leasing of low emission 
cars as part of our travel policy.

Greenhouse gas (“GHG”) emissions
In line with the GHG Protocol framework, we have 
calculated the GHG emissions associated with our 
Scope 1 and 2 operations. Scope 1 includes fuel 
emissions from buildings and company vehicles, and 
Scope 2 includes our emissions from electricity.

In 2016, our total GHG emissions were 6,730 tonnes of 
carbon dioxide equivalent (“tCO2e”), equating to 2.28 
tCO2e per employee, down 2.8% overall and 8.8% per 
employee since 2015. The largest source of GHG 
emissions was our Scope 2 electricity consumption. The 
relocation of our staff from the Tolworth office to a more 
energy efficient building in Wimbledon at the beginning of 
the year was the primary driver behind the reduction in 
our electricity and overall tCO2e emissions in 2016. Given 
its relative size our Banking division continues to account 
for the majority of our GHG emissions. The majority of the 
increased fuel (owned vehicles) consumption in 2016 was 
driven by the growth in the Banking division front office 
staff during the year.

A full breakdown of our 2016 GHG emissions, together 
with corresponding data for 2015, is shown on page 39.

Photographed on location at Matsuura Machinery Ltd.

Our Environment
Here at Close Brothers we care about the environment 
we operate in and are aware of our responsibility to 
protect natural resources and to behave sustainably. We 
believe, that as a financial services company, our 
environmental impact is limited and mostly driven by staff 
travel, our supply chain and our office network.

While relatively small, we continue to monitor ways to 
reduce this impact by lowering our energy consumption, 
reducing emissions and waste and increasing recycling. 
Each of our businesses manages its resources and 
recycling locally and all Banking division sites are now 
supplied from renewable sources.

In addition to this, we are a significant provider of finance 
to the green energy sector. Launched in 2014, our green 
energy lending business provides finance for wind, solar 
and hydro power developments, focusing on projects 
which are typically too small for standard project finance 
providers.

Energy consumption
We have completed an energy audit under the Energy 
Savings Opportunity Scheme regulations for the first time 
in December 2015. This new scheme requires large UK 
businesses to undertake an energy audit every four years 
which will aim to identify energy efficiency opportunities, 
leading to significant savings on future energy bills.

Close Brothers also participated in the CDP (formerly the 
“Carbon Disclosure Project”) this year, which involves 
disclosure of our greenhouse gas emissions on a 
voluntary basis.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016GHG Emissions by Division (tCO2e)

4,088 3,787 

787

898

878

1,153 

977

1,083 

Group

Banking

Securities

Asset
Management

2016

2015

Note: “Group” reflects the group headquarters which includes some Banking division businesses.

GHG Emissions Summary (tCO2e)

Scope
Scope 1

Scope 2

GHG emissions source
Fuel (Buildings)
Fuel (Owned vehicles)
Electricity

Total GHG emissions

Average number of employees
Total per employee

39

2016
160
3,229
3,341

20151
165
2,677
4,079

6,730

6,921

2,946
2.28

2,767
2.50

1  The prior year figures exclude the impact of discontinued activities, following the disposal of Close Brothers Seydler on 5 January 2015.

The Strategic Report was approved by the board and signed 
on its behalf by:

Preben Prebensen
Chief Executive

27 September 2016

Calculation
We have continued to gather data, working with an 
independent third party GHG emissions reporting company. 
This verifies the accuracy of our data and enables us to 
monitor our performance.

Our total GHG emissions are reported as tCO2e and are 
calculated in line with the GHG Protocol framework. In 
addition to reporting our total emissions, we have also 
disclosed the emissions per employee as an intensity metric 
to enable a comparable analysis.

Outlook
We will continue to monitor and report our GHG emissions, 
working to improve our energy efficiency across our 
businesses.

We encourage our offices to report their Scope 3 emissions 
for water and waste each quarter, where this information is 
available, to facilitate continued performance monitoring.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements 
 
 
 
40

Governance

42  Board of Directors
44  Executive Committee
45  Report of the Directors
47  Corporate Governance
60  Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration

Photographed on location at G&H Sheet Fed Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201641

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements42

Board of Directors
Board of Directors

Strone Macpherson
Chairman

Preben Prebensen
Chief Executive

Elizabeth Lee
Group Head of  
Legal and Regulatory 
Affairs

Stephen Hodges
Managing Director 
and Banking Chief 
Executive

Jonathan Howell
Group Finance 
Director

Stephen was 
appointed a director 
in August 1995 
with responsibility 
for the Banking 
division and became 
managing director in 
November 2002.

Stephen spent 
eight years at 
Hambros before 
joining the Banking 
division of Close 
Brothers in 1985.

Preben was 
appointed to the 
board as chief 
executive in April 
2009 when he joined 
Close Brothers.

Preben previously 
spent his career 
in a number of 
senior positions at 
JP Morgan over 
23 years, as well as 
being chief executive 
of Wellington 
Underwriting plc from 
2004 to 2006, and 
then chief investment 
officer and a member 
of the group executive 
committee at Catlin 
Group Limited.

Elizabeth was 
appointed a director 
in August 2012 with 
responsibility for legal 
and regulatory affairs.

Elizabeth joined 
Close Brothers as 
general counsel in 
September 2009. 
She was previously 
with Lehman Brothers 
and General Electric’s 
financial services 
businesses and prior 
to that she was a 
partner at the law 
firm Richards Butler 
(now Reed Smith).

Jonathan was 
appointed to the 
board as group 
finance director 
in February 2008 
when he joined 
Close Brothers.

Jonathan was 
previously group 
finance director 
of London Stock 
Exchange Group plc 
from 1999 to 2008. 
Prior to that he was 
at Price Waterhouse 
where he qualified 
as a chartered 
accountant. He is 
also a non-executive 
director of The Sage 
Group plc where he 
is chairman of the 
audit committee.

Strone was appointed 
a director in March 
2003, senior 
independent director 
in 2004, deputy 
chairman in 2006 
and chairman in June 
2008. He is chairman 
of the Nomination 
and Governance 
Committee.

Strone is also 
chairman of British 
Empire Securities 
and General Trust plc 
and a trustee of the 
King’s Fund. He was 
previously a director 
of Flemings, chairman 
of Tribal Group plc 
and of JP Morgan 
Smaller Companies 
Investment Trust plc, 
executive deputy 
chairman of Misys 
plc and a non-
executive director of 
AXA UK plc and of 
Kleinwort Benson 
Private Bank Limited.

zz_198390 Close Bros.indb   42

28/09/2016   14:20:09

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201643

Geoffrey Howe
Senior Independent 
Director

Bridget Macaskill
Independent Non-
executive Director

Lesley Jones
Independent Non- 
executive Director

Oliver Corbett
Independent Non-
executive Director

Geoffrey was 
appointed a 
director in January 
2011 and is senior 
independent director.

Bridget was appointed 
a director in November 
2013 and is chairman 
of the Remuneration 
Committee.

Lesley was appointed 
a director in December 
2013 and is chairman 
of the Risk Committee.

Oliver was appointed 
a director in June 2014 
and is chairman of the 
Audit Committee.

Geoffrey is chairman 
of Jardine Lloyd 
Thompson Group plc. 
He was previously 
chairman of Railtrack 
plc and of Nationwide 
Building Society, 
a non-executive 
director of Investec 
plc and of JP Morgan 
Overseas Investment 
Trust plc, a director 
of Robert Fleming 
Holdings Limited and 
managing partner 
of Clifford Chance.

Lesley has extensive 
banking experience, 
having previously  
held several line 
management positions 
within Citigroup and 
was group chief credit 
officer of Royal Bank 
of Scotland plc from 
2008 to 2014. Lesley is 
also a non-executive 
director of Northern 
Bank Limited and of  
N Brown Group plc.

Oliver is chief financial 
officer of Hyperion 
Insurance Group 
Limited and was 
formerly finance 
director of LCH. 
Clearnet Group 
Limited and of 
Novae Group plc. 
He is a chartered 
accountant and 
previously worked for 
KPMG, SG Warburg, 
Phoenix Securities 
(later Donaldson 
Lufkin Jenrette) and 
Dresdner Kleinwort 
Wasserstein, where 
he was managing 
director of investment 
banking. He was also 
a non-executive 
director of Rathbone 
Brothers plc.

Bridget is chairman of 
First Eagle Holdings 
LLC and senior 
adviser to First 
Eagle Investment 
Management LLC 
in New York City, 
of which she was 
president and chief 
executive officer 
until March 2016, a 
trustee of the TIAA-
CREF funds and 
a non-executive 
director of Jupiter 
Fund Management 
plc and of Jones Lang 
LaSalle Incorporated. 
She was previously a 
non-executive director 
of Prudential plc, 
Scottish & Newcastle 
plc, J Sainsbury plc, 
Hillsdown Holdings 
plc and of the Federal 
National Mortgage 
Association in the US.

zz_198390 Close Bros.indb   43

28/09/2016   14:20:18

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements44

Executive Committee

Preben Prebensen
Chief Executive

Elizabeth Lee
Group Head of Legal and
Regulatory Affairs

Stephen Hodges
Managing Director and
Banking Chief Executive

Jonathan Howell
Group Finance 
Director

Philip Yarrow
Winterflood
Chief Executive

Rebekah Etherington
Group Head of
Human Resources

Martin Andrew
Asset Management
Chief Executive

Tazim Essani
Group Head of Corporate
Development

Robert Sack
Group Chief Risk Officer

zz_198390 Close Bros.indb   44

28/09/2016   14:20:48

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201645

Report of the Directors

Results and Dividends
The consolidated results for the year are shown on page 87 
of the Financial Statements. The directors recommend a final 
dividend for the year of 38.0p (2015: 35.5p) on each ordinary 
share which, together with the interim dividend of 19.0p 
(2015: 18.0p), makes an ordinary distribution for the year of 
57.0p (2015: 53.5p) per share. The final dividend, if approved 
by shareholders at the 2016 Annual General Meeting 
(“AGM”), will be paid on 22 November 2016 to shareholders 
on the register at 14 October 2016.

Directors
The names of the directors of the company at the date of this 
report, together with biographical details, are given on pages 
42 and 43 of this Annual Report. All the directors held office 
throughout the year.

In accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, all 
directors offer themselves for reappointment at the 2016 
AGM, with the exception of Stephen Hodges who is retiring.

Directors’ interests
The directors’ interests in the share capital of the company at 
31 July 2016 are set out on pages 78 and 80 of the Report of 
the Board on Directors’ Remuneration.

Powers and appointment of directors 
Details on the powers and appointment of directors are set 
out on page 50 of the Corporate Governance report.

Directors’ indemnity
The company has granted indemnities to all of its directors 
on terms consistent with the applicable statutory provisions. 
Qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the purposes 
of section 234 of the Companies Act 2006 were accordingly 
in force during the course of the year, and remain in force at 
the date of this report.

Share Capital
The company’s share capital comprises one class of 
ordinary share with a nominal value of 25p each. At 31 July 
2016, 150,643,728 ordinary shares were in issue. During the 
year the company’s issued share capital increased by 9,992 
ordinary shares of 25p each through the issue of shares to 
satisfy option exercises. Full details of options exercised, the 
weighted average option exercise price and the weighted 
average market price at the date of exercise can be found in 
note 26 on page 120 of the Financial Statements.

Rights attaching to shares
On a show of hands, each member has the right to one vote 
at general meetings of the company. On a poll, each 
member would be entitled to one vote for every share held. 
The shares carry no rights to fixed income. No person has 
any special rights of control over the company’s share capital
and all shares are fully paid.

Restrictions on the transfer of shares
There are no specific restrictions on the transfer of the 
company’s shares which are governed by the general 
provisions of the articles of association and prevailing 
legislation.

The company is unaware of any arrangements between its 
shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of 
shares and/or voting rights.

New issues of share capital
Under section 551 of the Companies Act 2006, the directors 
may allot equity securities only with the express authorisation 
of shareholders which may be given in general meeting, but 
which cannot last more than five years. Under section 561 of 
the Companies Act, the board may not allot shares for cash 
(otherwise than pursuant to an employee share scheme) 
without first making an offer to existing shareholders to allot 
such shares to them on the same or more favourable terms 
in proportion to their respective shareholdings, unless this 
requirement is waived by a special resolution of the 
shareholders.

The existing authorities given to the company at the last 
AGM to allot shares will expire at the conclusion of the 
forthcoming AGM. Details of the resolutions renewing these 
authorities are included in the Notice of AGM.

Purchase of Own Shares
Under section 724 of the Companies Act 2006 a company 
may purchase its own shares to be held in treasury 
(“Treasury Shares”).

The existing authority given to the company at the last AGM 
to purchase Treasury Shares of up to 10% of its issued share 
capital will expire at the conclusion of the next AGM.

The board considers it would be appropriate to renew this 
authority and intends to seek shareholder approval to 
purchase Treasury Shares of up to 10% of its issued share 
capital at the forthcoming AGM in line with current investor 
sentiment.

Details of the resolution renewing the authority are included 
in the Notice of AGM.

Awards under the company’s employee share plans are met 
from a combination of shares purchased in the market and 
held either in treasury or in the employee share trust as well 
as by newly issued shares.

During the year the company made market purchases of 
670,000 Treasury Shares, representing 0.44% of its issued 
share capital for an aggregate consideration of £10.1 million. 
It transferred 1,158,454 shares out of treasury, to satisfy 
share option awards, for a total consideration of £1.4 million. 
The maximum number of Treasury Shares held at any time 
during the year was 1,310,190 with a nominal value of £0.3 
million.

Employee Share Trust
Bedell Trustees Limited is the trustee of the Close Brothers 
Group Employee Share Trust, an independent trust, which 
holds shares for the benefit of employees and former 
employees of the group. The trustee has agreed to satisfy a 
number of awards under the employee share plans. As part 
of these arrangements the company funds the trust, from 
time to time, to enable the trustee to acquire shares to satisfy 
these awards, details of which are set out in note 26 on 
pages 120 and 121 of the Financial Statements.

During the year, the employee share trust made market 
purchases of 944,481 ordinary shares.

Substantial Shareholdings
Details on substantial shareholdings in the company are set 
out on page 58 of the Corporate Governance report.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements46

Report of the Directors continued

Significant Contracts
A change of control of the company, following a takeover bid, 
may cause a number of agreements to which the company 
is party to take effect, alter or terminate. These include the 
company bond due 2017, certain insurance policies, bank 
facility agreements and employee share plans.

The group had committed facilities totalling £1.4 billion at 
31 July 2016 which contain clauses which require lender 
consent for any change of control. Should consent not be 
given, a change of control would trigger mandatory 
repayment of £1.4 billion of the facilities.

All of the company’s employee share plans contain 
provisions relating to a change of control. Outstanding 
awards and options may vest and become exercisable on  
a change of control, subject where appropriate to the 
satisfaction of any performance conditions at that time  
and pro-rating of awards.

Business Activities
The group’s business activities, together with the factors 
likely to affect its future development and performance and 
its summarised financial position are set out in the Strategic 
Report.

Financial Risk Management
The group has procedures in place to identify, monitor and 
evaluate the significant risks it faces. The group’s risk 
management objectives and policies are described on pages 
51 and 52 and the risks associated with the group’s financial 
instruments are analysed in note 28 on pages 123 to 133 of 
the Financial Statements.

Going Concern
The group has a strong, proven and conservative business 
model and has traded profitably during the year. It is well 
positioned in each of its core businesses, well capitalised, 
soundly funded and has adequate access to liquidity.

After making enquiries, the directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the company and the group have adequate 
resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the Annual Report. 

Viability Statement
In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the 2014 revision of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code, the board confirms that it 
has a reasonable expectation that the group will continue to 
operate and meet its liabilities, as they fall due, for the period 
up to 31 July 2019. A period of three years has been chosen 
for the following reasons: 
•  It is the period covered by the group’s strategic planning 

cycle; 

•  It is the period covered by the Internal Capital Adequacy 

Assessment Process (“ICAAP”) which forecasts key capital 
requirements; and 

•  It is the period covered by group-wide internal stress 

testing. 

•  The board’s risk appetite, and the robust assessment of 
the group’s principal risks and how these are managed 
including the results of the ICAAP – Risk and Control 
Framework on pages 51 and 52.

The strategy and associated principal risks, which the 
directors evaluate and approve annually, are a foundation of 
the group’s strategic plan and scenario testing. The plan 
considers the group’s future projections of profitability, cash 
flows, capital requirements and resources, liquidity ratios and 
other key financial and regulatory ratios over the period. 

These metrics are stress tested using sensitivity analysis 
including the ICAAP which involve flexing a number of the 
main assumptions underlying the plan.

Sustainability
Information on the company’s employment practices and 
greenhouse gas emissions is set out on pages 32 to 39 of 
the Strategic Report.

Post Balance Sheet Events
Details of post balance sheet events are given in note 30 on 
page 133 of the Financial Statements.

Political Donations
No political donations were made during the year (2015: £nil).

Resolutions at the AGM
The company’s AGM will be held on 17 November 2016. 
Resolutions to be proposed at the AGM include the renewal 
of the directors’ authority to allot shares, the disapplication of 
pre-emption rights, authority for the company to purchase its 
own shares and the re-election of all the directors standing 
for reappointment.

The full text of the resolutions is set out in the Notice of AGM 
sent to the company’s shareholders. A letter from the 
chairman, which explains the purpose of the resolutions, 
accompanies the Notice of AGM.

Auditor
Resolutions to reappoint Deloitte LLP as the company’s 
auditor and to give the directors the authority to determine 
the auditor’s remuneration will be proposed at the 
forthcoming AGM.

Disclosure of Information to Auditor
Each of the persons who are directors at the date of 
approval of this Annual Report confirms that:
•  So far as the director is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information of which the company’s auditor is unaware; 
and

•  They have taken all the steps that they ought to have taken 
as a director in order to make themselves aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish that the 
company’s auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

The Directors’ assessment has been made with reference to: 
•  The group’s current position and prospects – Financial 

By order of the board

Overview on pages 14 to 19;

•  The group’s business model and strategy – Business 

Model and Strategy on pages 8 to 13; and

Nicholas Jennings
Company Secretary

27 September 2016

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance

47

As chairman of Close Brothers, I view the 
governance and oversight of its distinctive 
and prudent business model and 
straightforward, consistent strategy as key 
to the continuing creation and delivery of 
high quality growth and returns throughout 
the economic cycle. This model ensures 
the provision of value to the company’s 
stakeholders in a range of market 
conditions.

To provide this oversight, the board met seven times this 
year. Prior to each meeting the board receives reports on the 
results of each of the divisions and key performance 
indicators, together with detailed updates on the progress 
and implementation of the agreed strategies for each 
division. The board has the opportunity to discuss the 
reports and challenge each of the divisional chief executives, 
who attend all or part of the board meetings, directly on the 
progress and implementation of their divisional strategy. In 
addition, in May 2016 the board attended two strategy days 
dedicated to discussing and reviewing the group’s long-term 
strategy with executive management.

The group’s strategy was set several years ago and 
continues to produce good growth and strong returns. This 
year the board’s focus has again been on reviewing its 
delivery by the divisions. Within the Banking division, there 
has been a monitoring of its major businesses, a review of 
the strengthening of its IT infrastructure and a continued 
focus on the further development of its risk management 
function. For the Securities division, the board has spent time 
reviewing the measures taken by Winterflood to manage 
volatile market conditions by reducing risk in order to 
maintain profitability.

Strone Macpherson, Chairman

For Asset Management, the focus has been on continuing to 
monitor progress in meeting strategic objectives and on 
reviewing IT strategy and ability to develop a high quality 
integrated proposition.

The board has also spent time considering challenges  
facing the businesses from political, regulatory and tax 
developments, reviewing the balance between controlling 
costs and continuing to invest in the business for the long 
term and examining trends in customer and competitor 
behaviour.

We are committed to the principles established in the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (“the Code”) issued by the 
Financial Reporting Council (“FRC”) in September 2014. This 
report will explain and demonstrate how the group has 
applied the principles set out in the Code and complied with 
its provisions of best practice.

Strone Macpherson
Chairman

27 September 2016

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements48

Compliance
The Code has been applied by the company throughout the 
financial year. In April 2016, the FRC updated the Code, 
publishing a revised UK Corporate Governance Code
(“the Revised Code”). The Revised Code is not applicable to 
the company in the year under review, but the company will 
report under it in the financial year ending 31 July 2017.

The Code sets out guidance on best practice in the form of 
principles and provisions on how companies should be 
directed and controlled to follow good governance practice. 
The Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”) requires companies 
with a premium listing in the UK to disclose, in relation to the 
Code, how they have applied its principles and whether they 
have complied with its provisions throughout the financial 
year. Where the provisions have not been complied with, 
companies must provide an explanation for this.

It is the board’s view that the company’s governance regime 
has been fully compliant with the best practice set out in the 
Code for the financial year.

A copy of the Code can be found on the FRC’s website: 
www.frc.org.uk.

The Board
Leadership of the board
The board’s primary role is to provide leadership, ensure that 
the company is appropriately managed and delivers long-
term shareholder value. It sets the group’s strategic 
objectives and provides direction for the group as a whole.  
A number of key decisions are reserved for and may only be 
made by the board, which enables the board and executive 
management to operate within a clear governance 
framework. These specific responsibilities are set out in a
schedule of matters reserved to the board, which is 
published on the company’s website, and they are 
summarised opposite.

Governance Framework
Board governance structure

The Board

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Risk 
Committee

Nomination and 
Governance Committee

Executive Committee
Responsible for developing strategy, setting business objectives and assisting the chief executive with management of the group.

Board and committee meeting attendance 2015/2016
The attendance of directors at board and committee meetings of which they were members during the financial year is shown 
in the table below. Some directors also attended committee meetings as invitees during the year. This is not reflected in the 
table.

Board

Audit Committee

Remuneration  
Committee

Risk Committee1

Nomination and  
Governance Committee

Attended

Total

Attended

Total

Attended

Total

Attended

Total

Attended

Total

Executive director
Preben Prebensen
Stephen Hodges
Jonathan Howell
Elizabeth Lee
Non-executive director
Strone Macpherson
Oliver Corbett
Geoffrey Howe
Lesley Jones
Bridget Macaskill

7
7
7
7

7
7
7
7
7

7
7
7
7

7
7
7
7
7

5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5

6
6
6
6

6
6
6
6

5
5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5
5

1  The Risk Committee held five regular meetings during the year, together with one meeting specifically to consider the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment 

Process.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance continued49

Specific responsibilities
•  Approval of strategy and monitoring its delivery.
•  Oversight of risk management, regulatory compliance 

and internal control.

•  Ensuring adequate financial resources.
•  Acquisitions, disposals and expenditure over certain 

thresholds.

•  Approval of communications to shareholders.
•  Board membership and other appointments.
•  Corporate governance matters.

The board has delegated specific powers for some matters 
to its committees, as set out in each committee’s terms of 
reference. These terms of reference, which are reviewed 
annually, detail a full list of each committee’s responsibilities 
and are available on our website at www.closebrothers.com/
investor-relations/investor-information/corporate-governance. 
The chairman of each committee reports regularly to the 
board on matters discussed at committee meetings.

At each scheduled meeting the board receives reports from 
the chief executive and finance director on the performance 
and results of the group. In addition, the heads of the 
Banking, Securities and Asset Management divisions update 
the board on performance, strategic developments and 
initiatives in their respective areas and the head of legal and 
regulatory affairs provides updates on legal matters. In 
addition the board receives updates from the group 
operating functions on human resources and corporate 
development matters, risk, compliance and internal audit.

There is an annual schedule of rolling agenda items to ensure 
that all matters are given due consideration and are reviewed 
at the appropriate point in the financial and regulatory cycle. 
Meetings are structured to ensure that there is sufficient time 
for consideration and debate of all matters.

During the year, the board has spent time particularly on:
•  Presentations from businesses within the Banking division;
•  Review of IT strategy and information systems;
•  Review of the competitive landscape;
•  Engagement with regulators and HM Treasury;
•  Discussions over prioritisation of investment expenditure;
•  Review of the group Recovery and Resolution Plan;
•  Approval of the ICAAP;
•  Careful monitoring of market conditions prior to and 

following the UK referendum and consideration of the 
implications of its result;

•  Review of implementation of recommendations of 2015 

Board Effectiveness Review;

•  Understanding the EU Market Abuse Regulation; and
•  A discussion of the format and content of the board 

papers and of its use of time.

All directors also attended a dedicated two day strategy 
session in May 2016 on strategy development and execution.

Board size, composition and independence
The board comprises nine members: the chairman, four 
executive directors and four independent non-executive 
directors.

The structure of the board ensures that no individual or 
group of individuals is able to dominate the decision making 
process and no undue reliance is placed on any individual. 
The board comprises six male and three female members. 
This means that a third of the directors are women. The 
company is committed to ensuring that any vacancies  

that may arise are filled by the most qualified candidates and 
recognises the value of diversity in the composition of the 
board. When board positions become available as a result of 
retirement, resignation or otherwise, it is focused on ensuring 
that a diverse pool of candidates is considered. Recent 
appointments have required specialist qualifications and 
extensive financial services experience, whilst also widening 
the range of insights and perspectives brought to the board’s 
deliberations.

Details of the individual directors and their biographies are 
set out on pages 42 and 43.

The board has assessed the independence of each of the 
non-executive directors and is of the opinion that each acts 
in an independent and objective manner and therefore, 
under the Code, is independent and free from any 
relationship that could affect their judgement. The board’s 
opinion was determined by considering for each 
non-executive director:
•  Whether they are independent in character and 

judgement;

•  How they conduct themselves in board and committee 

meetings;

•  Whether they have any interests which may give rise to an 

actual or perceived conflict of interest; and

•  Whether they act in the best interests of the company and 

of all its shareholders at all times.

The company has therefore complied with the Code 
provision that at least half the board, excluding the chairman, 
should comprise independent non-executive directors. Each 
non-executive director is required to confirm at least annually, 
whether any circumstances exist which could impair their 
independence.

Meetings and attendance
The board held seven scheduled meetings in addition to the 
two day strategy session. Details of attendance at board 
meetings can be found on page 48.

The directors receive detailed papers in advance of each 
board meeting. The board agenda is carefully structured by 
the chairman in consultation with the chief executive and the 
company secretary. Each director may review the agenda 
and propose items for discussion with the chairman’s 
agreement. Additional information is also circulated to 
directors between meetings including relevant updates on 
the business and regulatory announcements.

The annual schedule of board meetings is decided a 
substantial time in advance in order to ensure the availability 
of each of the directors. In the event that directors are unable 
to attend meetings due to conflicts in their schedule, they 
receive papers in the normal manner and have the 
opportunity to relay their comments in advance of the 
meeting, as well as follow up with the chairman if necessary. 
The same process applies in respect of the various board 
committees.

Chairman and chief executive
The roles of the chairman and chief executive are separate 
and there is a clear division of responsibilities between the 
two roles. The chairman is Strone Macpherson. His other 
significant commitments are set out in his biography on page 
42. The board is satisfied that his other commitments do not 
restrict him from carrying out his duties effectively.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements50

As chairman, Strone Macpherson is primarily responsible for 
leading the board and ensuring the effective engagement 
and contribution of all the directors. His other responsibilities 
include setting the agenda for board meetings, providing the 
directors with information in an accurate, clear and timely 
manner and the promotion of effective decision making. The 
chairman is also charged with ensuring that the directors 
continually update their skills and knowledge and that the 
performance of the board, its committees and the individual 
directors is evaluated on an annual basis.

The group chief executive is Preben Prebensen who is 
primarily responsible for the day-to-day management of the 
group’s business. His other responsibilities include proposing 
and developing strategic objectives for the group, managing 
the group’s risk exposures in line with board policies, 
implementing the decisions of the board and facilitating 
appropriate and effective communication with shareholders 
and regulatory bodies.

Senior independent director
The senior independent director is Geoffrey Howe. In 
addition to the existing channels for shareholder 
communications, shareholders may discuss any issues or 
concerns they may have with the senior independent 
director.

Powers of directors
The directors are responsible for the management of the 
company. They may exercise all powers of the company, 
subject to any directions given by special resolution and the 
articles of association. The directors have been authorised to 
allot and issue ordinary shares and to make market 
purchases of the company’s ordinary shares by virtue of 
resolutions passed at the company’s 2015 AGM.

Board evaluation
In 2015, the evaluation of the board and its committees was 
carried out by an external consultant. The report contained a 
number of observations and recommendations, designed to 
encourage the board to optimise its contribution to the 
success of the company and to add value beyond the legal 
requirements, by building on existing strengths, agreeing the 
challenges ahead and preparing for the future. Overall, the 
conclusions from the evaluation were positive and identified 
a number of board strengths.

In April 2016, the Nomination and Governance Committee 
recommended that the 2016 board evaluation be undertaken 
internally, as permitted by the Code. The evaluation took the 
form of confidential questionnaires which assessed the 
performance of the board and its committees.

The questions were set to develop the themes explored in 
previous years’ evaluations in order to assess the progress of 
the board over the year, particularly in its implementation of 
the recommendations made in 2015. The 2016 evaluation 
therefore focused on the following areas:
•  Review of implementation of 2015 recommendations;
•  Use of time at meetings;
•  Strategic direction;
•  Further development of the board as a team;
•  Succession planning; and
•  Exposure to the senior management cadre.

The feedback from the evaluations was collated by the 
company secretary, reviewed with the chairman and 
presented to the board by the chairman in June 2016.

The verbal feedback was insightful and the responses were 
positive. They were concentrated on engagement in strategic 
planning, use of time, quality of board materials and board 
composition.

The 2016 evaluation also assessed the effectiveness of each 
of the board’s committees. The committee members were 
asked questions regarding governance arrangements, the 
quality of advice and input from external advisers, the quality 
of contribution of relevant internal functions, the timeliness, 
relevance and quality of presentations and disclosure by the 
executive and the overall effectiveness of the committees. 
The feedback was positive with improved scores given, 
compared to two years ago.

The evaluation confirmed the directors’ opinion that the 
board and its committees continue to be highly effective.

In addition to the board evaluation process, the senior 
independent director led a separate performance review in 
respect of the chairman which involved a review with the 
non-executive directors, excluding the chairman, and 
separate consultation with the chief executive. The senior 
independent director subsequently provided feedback to the 
chairman on his appraisal which confirmed his effectiveness.

EU Market Abuse Regulation
In June 2016, the board received a report on the impact of 
the EU Market Abuse Regulation (“MAR”) which on 3 July 
2016 replaced the Model Code, contained within the FCA 
Listing Rules, and many of the FCA Disclosure Rules. The 
directors were informed of the restrictions on personal share 
account dealing applicable to them as persons discharging 
managerial responsibility, set out in MAR and in the 
company’s revised share dealing policy for them.

Given the expansion of the scope of the regime and the 
introduction of more stringent regulation and significant new 
procedural requirements in a number of areas, it was 
decided to establish a Disclosure Committee. The purpose 
of this new committee is to assist with ensuring timely and 
accurate disclosure of all information that the company is 
required to disclose to meet the legal and regulatory 
obligations and requirements arising from its listing on the 
London Stock Exchange.

Appointment of directors
The appointment of directors is governed by the company’s 
articles of association, the Companies Act 2006 and other 
applicable regulations and policies. Directors may be elected 
by shareholders in general meeting or appointed by the 
board of directors in accordance with the provisions of the 
articles of association. The articles of association may be 
amended by special resolution of the shareholders and were 
last amended in November 2009.

In accordance with the Code all directors are subject to 
re-election at the AGM. The board will only recommend to 
shareholders that executive and non-executive directors be 
proposed for re-election at an AGM after evaluating the 
performance of the individual directors. Following the 
performance evaluations, the board will be recommending 
that all directors standing for re-election be re-elected by 
shareholders and confirms that each director continues to be 
effective and demonstrates commitment to their role.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance continued51

Letters of appointment are available for inspection by 
shareholders at each AGM and during normal business 
hours at the company’s registered office.

Induction and professional development
On appointment all new directors receive a comprehensive 
and personalised induction programme to familiarise them 
with the company and to meet their specific requirements. 
The company also provides bespoke inductions for directors 
when they are appointed as a committee chairman. 
Induction programmes are tailored to a director’s particular 
requirements, but would typically include site visits, one-to-
one meetings with executive directors, the company 
secretary, senior management for the business areas and 
support functions and a confidential meeting with the 
external auditor. Directors also receive guidance on directors’ 
liabilities and responsibilities.

There is a central training programme in place for the 
directors which is reviewed and considered by the board. In 
addition, the chairman discusses and agrees any specific 
requirements as part of each non-executive director’s half 
year and year end reviews. During the year, training took the 
form of informal meetings with senior management within the 
businesses and control functions, lunches with emerging 
leaders and with members of the graduate programme, 
in-depth business reviews, attendance at external seminars 
and briefings from the regulators and from internal and 
external advisers covering topics such as:
•  Senior Managers Regime;
•  Cyber security;
•  Digital marketing and social media;
•  Corporate governance update;
•  Regulatory developments;
•  Accounting changes;
•  Audit tendering and rotation; and
•  Whistle-blowing.

Training and development records are maintained by the 
company secretary and reviewed annually by the chairman 
and each individual director.

The company secretary is responsible for ensuring that the 
board procedures and applicable rules and regulations are 
observed. All directors have direct access to the services 
and advice of the company secretary who also acts as 
secretary to each of the board committees. Directors are 
able to take independent external professional advice to 
assist with the performance of their duties at the company’s 
expense.

Risk and Control Framework
The board has overall responsibility for maintaining a system 
of internal control to ensure that an effective risk 
management and oversight process operates across the 
group. The risk management framework and associated 
governance arrangements are designed to ensure that there 
is a clear organisation structure with well defined, transparent 
and consistent lines of responsibility and effective processes 
to identify, manage, monitor and report the risks to which the 
group is, or might become, exposed. The board has a well 
defined risk appetite with risk appetite measures which are 
integrated into decision making, monitoring and reporting 

processes, with early warning trigger levels set to drive the 
required corrective action before overall tolerance levels are 
reached. The risk framework, through key committees, 
including the Risk Committee and Audit Committee, is the 
mechanism that ensures the board receives comprehensive 
risk information in a timely manner.

Identification, measurement and management of risk are 
fundamental to the success of the group. Over the past 
12 months the group has continued to strengthen its risk 
management framework and further develop the group’s risk 
committees, at both board and divisional level, and these 
continue to work efficiently and effectively.

The group’s risk and control framework is designed to allow 
the capture of business opportunities while maintaining an 
appropriate balance of risk and reward within the group’s 
agreed risk appetite. It further ensures that the risks to which 
the group is, or may become, exposed are appropriately 
identified, and that those which the group chooses to take, 
are managed, controlled and where necessary, mitigated, so 
that the group is not subject to material unexpected loss.

The group reviews and adjusts its risk appetite annually as 
part of the strategy setting process. This aligns risk taking 
with the achievement of strategic objectives. Adherence to 
appetite is monitored by the group’s risk committees.

The Risk Committee throughout the year undertakes a 
robust assessment of the principal risks facing the group and 
has reviewed reports from the risk function on the processes 
for the management and mitigation of those risks. The 
Committee confirms through annual review, the adequacy 
and effectiveness of the group’s risk management and 
internal control arrangements in relation to the group’s 
strategy and risk profile for the financial year. On the basis of 
its own review, the board considers that it has in place 
adequate systems and controls with regard to the 
company’s profile and strategy.

The risk management framework is based on the concept of 
“three lines of defence”, as set out in the table on page 52, 
and the key principles underlying risk management in the 
group are:
•  Business management own all the risks assumed 
throughout the group and are responsible for their 
management on a day-to-day basis to ensure that risk and 
return are balanced;

•  The board and business management promote a culture 
in which risks are identified, assessed and reported in an 
open, transparent and objective manner;

•  The overriding priority is to protect the group’s long-term 
viability and produce sustainable medium to long-term 
revenue streams;

•  Risk functions are independent of the businesses and 

provide oversight of and advice on the management of risk 
across the group;

•  Risk management activities across the group are 

proportionate to the scale and complexity of the group’s 
individual businesses;

•  Risk mitigation and control activities are commensurate 

with the degree of risk; and

•  Risk management and control supports decision making.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements52

Risk Management Framework

First line of defence
The businesses

Second line of defence
Risk and Compliance

Third line of defence
Internal Audit

Group Risk and Compliance Committee
(Reports to the Risk Committee)

Risk Committee
(Reports to the board)

Audit Committee
(Reports to the board)

Chief executive delegates to divisional 
and operating business heads day-to- 
day responsibility for risk management, 
regulatory compliance, internal control 
and conduct in running their divisions 
or businesses.

Business management has day-to-day 
ownership, responsibility and 
accountability for risks:
•  Identifying and assessing risks;
•  Managing and controlling risks;
•  Measuring risk (key risk indicators/

early warning indicators);

•  Mitigating risks; and
•  Reporting risks.

Key features
•  Promotes a strong risk culture and 
focus on sustainable risk-adjusted 
returns;

•  Implements the risk framework;
•  Promotes a culture of adhering to 

limits and managing risk exposures;
•  Promotes a culture of customer focus 

and appropriate behaviours;

Risk Committee delegates to the group 
chief risk officer day-to-day responsibility 
for oversight and challenge on risk 
related issues.

Audit Committee mandates the head of 
group internal audit with day-to-day 
responsibility for independent 
assurance.

Risk functions (including compliance) 
provide support and independent 
challenge on:
•  The design and operation of the risk 

Internal audit provides independent 
assurance on:
•  First and second line of defence;
•  Appropriateness/effectiveness of 

framework;

•  Risk assessment;
•  Risk appetite and strategy;
•  Performance management;
•  Risk reporting;
•  Adequacy of mitigation plans; and
•  Group risk profile.

internal controls; and
•  Effectiveness of policy 

implementation.

Key features
•  Draws on deep knowledge of the 

group and its businesses;

•  Independent assurance on the 

Key features
•  Overarching “risk oversight unit” takes 
an integrated view of risk (qualitative 
and quantitative);

activities of the firm including the risk 
management framework;

•  Assesses the appropriateness and 

effectiveness of internal controls; and

•  Supports through developing and 

•  Incorporates review of culture and 

advising on risk strategies;

•  Facilitates constructive check and 
challenge – “critical friend”/“trusted 
adviser”; and

conduct.

•  Ongoing monitoring of positions and 

•  Oversight of business conduct.

management of risks;
•  Portfolio optimisation; and
•  Self-assessment.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance continued53

The Risk Committee’s principal roles and 
responsibilities are to support the board in 
its oversight of risk management across 
the group. The following sections set out 
the Committee’s membership, its key 
responsibilities and the principal areas of 
risk upon which we have focused during 
the year. The identification, management 
and mitigation of risk is fundamental to 
the success of the group. The Committee 
plays an important role in setting the tone 
and culture that promotes effective risk 
management across the group.

Risk Committee
Chairman’s overview
The UK’s decision to leave the EU will pose challenges for 
consumers and companies alike until the economic impact 
of the vote becomes clearer. While the economy remains 
fundamentally strong, increased vigilance will be required 
to assess the full extent of potential UK exit on key 
macroeconomic factors. Given the uneven recovery of the 
global economy in recent years, global markets remain 
sensitive to geopolitical shifts, and in addition to the 
uncertainties stemming from the recent referendum, the UK 
remains susceptible to further dislocation within the 
Eurozone.

Economic challenges, and a heavy regulatory agenda 
targeted at bolstering the strength of the banking industry 
and the conduct of those working within it, have kept the 
Risk Committee fully occupied throughout the year. I am 
pleased to report that Close Brothers’ prudent and 
consistent risk appetite has allowed us to maintain a robust 
capital position and low risk profile. Significant 
enhancements to our risk management and risk appetite 
frameworks have been made throughout the year, and we 
are satisfied that we have the skills and talent across the 
group to meet the challenges and opportunities that lie 
ahead.

Lesley Jones, Chairman of the Risk Committee

As in previous years the Committee apportions its time 
between the planned periodic review of key portfolio risks 
and the close scrutiny of new business risks as they develop. 
This approach allows us to ensure that emerging risks can 
be identified and debated and that management’s plans for 
risk mitigation are well understood and appropriately 
resourced. During the year the Committee saw further 
improvement in the quality of the management information 
that it receives.

Committee roles and responsibilities
The Committee’s key roles and responsibilities are to:
•  Oversee the maintenance and development of a 

supportive culture in relation to the management of risk;
•  Review and set risk appetite, which is the level of risk the 
group is willing to take in pursuit of its strategic objectives;

•  Monitor the group’s risk profile against the prescribed 

appetite;

•  Review the effectiveness of the risk framework to ensure 
that key risks are identified and appropriately managed; 
and

•  Provide input from a risk perspective into the alignment of 

remuneration with performance against risk appetite 
(through the Remuneration Committee).

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements54

Membership and meetings
The Committee comprises each of the independent non-
executive directors, with me as chairman. Five scheduled 
meetings were held during the year and these were 
supplemented by an additional meeting for early review of 
the annual ICAAP and its stress assumptions.

Full details of attendance by the non-executive directors at 
these meetings during the year are set out on page 48.

Emerging risk assessment has been an increasing focus of 
the risk management team and a standing agenda item for 
the Committee’s discussion. In the run-up to the UK’s EU 
referendum, the Committee considered and discussed the 
group’s preparedness for a potential UK exit from the EU, 
and oversaw the development of the group’s strategy to 
ensure any immediate impact would be appropriately 
mitigated. This work stood us in good stead as the result of 
the referendum became clear.

In addition to the members of the Committee, standing 
invitations are extended to the company chairman, the 
executive directors, the chief risk officer, the head of 
compliance and the head of internal audit. All attend our 
Committee meetings as a matter of course and have 
supported and informed the Committee’s discussions.

Other executives, subject matter experts, risk team 
members and external advisers are invited to attend the 
Committee from time to time as required to present and 
advise on reports commissioned.

I meet regularly with the chief risk officer and his risk team in 
a combination of formal and informal sessions, and with 
senior management across all divisions of the group to 
discuss the business environment and to gather their views 
of emerging risks.

Activity in the 2016 financial year
Further enhancements were made to the group’s risk 
management framework in 2016, including the continued 
evolution of the three lines of defence model to ensure that it 
remains aligned to industry and regulatory standards. The 
risk organisational design was revised with the amalgamation 
of all risk teams under common leadership. New enterprise-
wide risk roles were also created covering operational risk, 
risk assurance, model risk and risk appetite. These changes 
have proved invaluable in providing the Committee with 
improved governance, oversight and quantitative metrics. 
Changes to the risk governance framework also resulted in 
improved visibility and consistency across the group’s risk 
and compliance committees, as well as enhanced reporting 
capability across the group and at board level.

The identification and management of conduct risk was 
strengthened with the development of a new conduct risk 
framework. The greater detail now available as a result of 
these enhancements will improve the board’s top-down 
visibility on behaviours across the group, and provide further 
comfort that the group’s sound risk culture is well 
embedded.

Cyber crime is becoming ever more sophisticated and the 
increasing frequency of cyber attacks across the sector has 
highlighted the importance of having strong cyber defences 
to protect the group’s systems and the customer data that 
the group may hold. During the year the board and the 
Committee have regularly reviewed the strength of the 
group’s cyber defences including the results of a group-wide 
cyber exercise undertaken to ensure that our systems and 
people are well prepared to respond to any attack.

A number of areas of operational risk were stressed as part 
of the annual ICAAP process. Following robust debate and 
challenge, the Committee and board were satisfied that the 
group’s business model and allocated risk appetite remained 
appropriate. This is an important outcome given the number 
of change management programmes underway across the 
group, and in our regular meetings there is specific focus on 
the progress of key projects and initiatives.

Ensuring that we remain fully compliant with the numerous 
new banking rules is increasingly challenging and we 
continue to actively engage with the PRA, FCA and industry 
bodies to ensure that our risk framework remains 
appropriate and relevant for all our businesses.

Remuneration
The linkage between culture, risk and compensation is an 
important one and the Risk Committee and the chief risk 
officer have provided input to the Remuneration Committee 
again this year to ensure that risk behaviours and the 
management of operational risk incidents over the course of 
the financial year were appropriately reflected in decisions 
taken about performance and reward.

Looking ahead to 2017
Key priorities for the coming year include:
•  Refining our early warning indicators, to further develop 

our ability to identify and respond effectively to changes in 
the economic environment, particularly following the UK’s 
decision to leave the EU.

•  Embedding the enhanced group risk appetite framework, 
including the continued development of quantitative risk 
appetite methodologies. 

•  Continuously improving our management information, risk 
systems and risk reporting capabilities, to underpin the 
effectiveness and efficiency of the Committee.

•  Implementing the fourth Money Laundering Directive and 

preparing for MIFID II. 

Lesley Jones
Chairman of the Risk Committee

27 September 2016

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance continued55

The Audit Committee’s key roles and 
responsibilities are to assess the 
integrity of the group’s external 
financial reporting and in particular to 
review management’s significant 
financial reporting judgements to 
ensure they are appropriate, review 
the effectiveness of the group’s 
internal controls, and monitor and 
review the activities and performance 
of both internal and external audit.

Oliver Corbett, Chairman of the Audit Committee

Audit Committee
Chairman’s overview
The Committee has considered a wide range of topics this 
year with key areas of focus on the following:
•  Review and challenge of the group’s external financial 

reporting and in particular the key accounting judgements 
taken in preparing the financial statements. 

•  Oversight of the effectiveness of both internal and external 
audit including preparation for the external audit tender 
process to be carried out during the 2017 financial year.

•  Review and challenge of key group financial policies 

including a revised whistle-blowing policy.

•  Monitoring the group’s response to current and future 

accounting and regulatory change. In particular we have 
considered the adequacy and reasonableness of the 
group’s disclosures around the new viability statement and 
received a further update on management’s preparation 
for the revised impairment approach required by IFRS 9 
“Financial Instruments”.

Looking forward, the Committee’s agenda will continue to be 
focused on these key areas, with particular focus in the year 
ahead on the oversight of the audit tender process.

Membership and meetings
The Committee comprises each of the independent non-
executive directors and acts independently of the executive 
to protect the interests of shareholders.

Five meetings of the Committee were held during the year 
scheduled to coincide with the financial reporting cycle of the 
group. Attendance details of each of the Committee 
members is shown in the table on page 48. The 
qualifications of each of the members are outlined in the 
biographies on page 43. The board considers that I have the 
appropriate recent and relevant experience.

As well as the non-executive members of the Committee, 
standing invitations are extended to the chairman of the 
board and the executive directors, all of whom attend 
meetings as a matter of practice. The heads of internal audit, 
risk and compliance as well as the group financial controller 
also attend meetings by invitation and I meet with this group 
along with the group finance director in advance of each 
meeting to agree the agenda and receive full briefing on all 
relevant issues. Finally, the lead audit partner also attends 
each of the meetings and I have regular contact with him 
throughout the year. The Committee met with both internal 
and external audit privately at each meeting held during  
the year.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements56

Other policies
The Committee also completed annual reviews of the 
group’s recovery and resolution plan, tax position and policy, 
approach to hedging for share awards and approved a 
revised policy for non-audit services to the external auditor to 
reflect updated rules and guidance.

Internal Audit
The Committee receives a report from the head of internal 
audit at each meeting summarising audits completed as well 
as monitoring progress on agreed actions from previous 
audits. The report also details key themes, audits planned 
and in progress, as well as commentary on internal audit 
related business culture. During the year 26 audits were 
completed. In addition the Committee reviewed and agreed 
the internal audit plan as well as pre-approving any changes 
to the plan throughout the year. 

Following the prior year independent effectiveness review of 
internal audit, an internal effectiveness survey was completed 
in the year. This review further confirmed the Committee’s 
view that the internal audit function is effective.

The Committee continues to keep the level of resources of 
the internal audit team under review. Since 2009, the group 
has operated a co-source arrangement with PwC to ensure 
the function has sufficient access to expertise across the 
whole group. The group intends to carry out a tender for this 
arrangement in the 2017 financial year.

External Audit
The Committee assesses the independence and objectivity, 
qualifications and effectiveness of the external auditor on an 
annual basis as well as making a recommendation on the 
reappointment of the auditor to the board.

Our evaluation which was consistent with prior years focused 
on the following key areas:
•  The quality of audit expertise, judgement and dialogue 

with the Committee and senior management;

•  The independence and objectivity demonstrated by the 

audit team; and

•  The quality of service including consistency of approach 

and responsiveness.

This process was facilitated by a group-wide survey of 
finance teams, a survey of the Deloitte LLP senior audit 
team’s view on the group and a review of audit and non-
audit fees.

Overall the Committee has concluded that Deloitte LLP 
remain independent and that their audit is effective.

Activity in the 2016 Financial Year
Key accounting judgements
Credit provisioning
The Committee received presentations from management 
explaining the provisioning methodology across the group’s 
lending operations ahead of both the interim and full year 
results. Management and the external auditors were 
challenged over the level of provisioning and, noting the 
consistency of approach taken, the Committee concluded 
that the provisioning approach and judgements made  
were reasonable.

The Committee was also updated on progress with 
management’s work in preparation for the introduction of 
IFRS 9 which will require provisioning methodology to take 
into account future expected losses. The Committee will 
continue to monitor progress in preparation for this material 
accounting change which will apply to the group from the 
2019 financial year.

Revenue recognition
The Committee reviewed a paper outlining the group’s 
approach to revenue recognition, highlighting the key areas 
where management judgement is required particularly 
around interest, fee and commission income. The 
Committee was reassured over the consistency of approach 
and ultimately was satisfied that the approach taken 
continued to be appropriate.

Goodwill
The annual assessment of the carrying value of goodwill was 
reviewed as well as a paper during the year considering the 
goodwill carried in relation to Winterflood following the lower 
reported profits for that business in the first half of the 
financial year. Following review and challenge of the group’s 
value in use calculations and key assumptions, the 
Committee agreed with management’s conclusion that the 
carrying value of goodwill across the group was reasonably 
stated.

Other financial reporting
Viability statement
In order to support the board’s approval of the statement on 
page 46 as to the longer-term viability of the group, the 
Committee reviewed papers from management setting out 
the intended approach to the new disclosure and providing 
details in support of the statement based in particular on the 
group’s three year plan and the results of stress testing.

Fair, balanced and understandable
The Committee continues to consider on behalf of the board 
whether the group’s reporting is fair, balanced and 
understandable. This included discussing the disclosures as 
a whole with the executive directors.

Policy oversight and review
Whistle-blowing
The Committee oversaw and agreed a revised whistle-
blowing policy. The policy was re-launched to all staff with an 
email from me as the group’s whistle-blowers’ champion. 
This reiterated the importance the group places on all staff 
understanding the process to enable to speak out when 
appropriate.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance continued57

The Committee oversees the group’s policy on the provision 
of non-audit services by the external auditor. The policy was 
revised during the year to reflect revised ethical guidance on 
auditor independence issued by the FRC. The main impact 
of the new guidance for the group is that tax compliance 
services will no longer be provided by the external auditor 
and the group appointed new advisers during the year. 
However, while the key principle of our policy remains that 
permission to engage the external auditor will always be 
refused when a threat to independence and/or objectivity is 
perceived, the Committee continues to see benefits for the 
group in engaging Deloitte LLP where:
•  Work is closely related to the audit;
•  A detailed understanding of the group is required; and
•  Deloitte LLP is able to provide a higher quality and/or 

better value service.

During the year non-audit fees amounted to £0.7 million and 
were 59% of the overall audit fee (2015: 56%). Non-audit fees 
in the year were:

Assurance work on:

Systems and controls
Funding

Tax compliance

£ million

0.3
0.2
0.2

0.7

The Committee concluded that all of these fees fell within its 
criteria for engaging Deloitte LLP and does not believe they 
pose a threat to the auditor’s independence or objectivity.

Audit tender
As previously reported every year since the 2013 Annual 
Report, the Committee intends that an audit tender will take 
place to coincide with the completion of the current lead 
partner’s five year term in 2017. The Committee will oversee 
the tender process and is committed to ensure a fair, 
transparent and proportionate process is put in place 
including a clearly articulated set of selection criteria agreed 
by the Committee in advance.

Deloitte LLP or its predecessor firm has audited the group 
since it was first listed in 1984, but has only acted as the 
group’s sole auditor since 2008. Although a full audit tender 
was not carried out, a detailed proposal was reviewed at that 
time prior to Deloitte LLP’s appointment as sole auditor to 
the group. Given the length of its tenure and the revised 
code, Deloitte LLP will not participate in the tender process.

Oliver Corbett
Chairman of the Audit Committee

27 September 2016

Nomination and Governance Committee
This report sets out the role and responsibilities of the 
Nomination and Governance Committee.

Committee roles and responsibilities
The Committee’s key roles and responsibilities are:
•  Regularly reviewing the structure, size and composition  

of the board;

•  Considering the leadership needs of the group and 

considering succession planning for directors and other 
senior executives;

•  Considering the appointment or retirement of directors;
•  Evaluating the skills, knowledge and experience required 
for a particular appointment, normally with the assistance 
of external advisers used to facilitate the search for suitable 
candidates; and

•  Assessing the contribution of the non-executive directors.

Membership and meetings
The Committee comprises Geoffrey Howe, the senior 
independent director, Oliver Corbett, Lesley Jones and 
Bridget Macaskill who chair the Audit, Risk and 
Remuneration Committees respectively and me as 
chairman. Each of the Committee members is independent.

Five meetings were held during the year which were 
attended by all members. In addition, the chief executive 
attends meetings by invitation, as does the group head of 
human resources when presenting a review of talent and 
executive management succession planning.

Non-executive directors’ skill sets
During the year, the Committee reaffirmed its members’ skill 
sets including each of its members’ extensive experience 
within a financial services organisation. Geoffrey Howe is 
senior independent director with extensive experience within 
the industry including as a chairman. Oliver Corbett has 
strong financial skills and a track record of audit committee 
experience including as a finance director. Lesley Jones has 
familiarity with FCA/PRA and EU risk regulations and Bridget 
Macaskill has significant remuneration committee credentials 
and familiarity with FCA/PRA and EU remuneration regulations.

Activity in the 2016 financial year
During the year the Committee focused on:
•  Board succession;
•  Talent review and executive management succession 

planning;

•  Board evaluation including a review of implementation of 

the recommendations from the 2015 review; and

•  Review of the non-executive directors’ skill sets to ensure 
that an appropriate balance of skills has been maintained.

Strone Macpherson
Chairman of the Nomination and Governance Committee

27 September 2016

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements58

Remuneration Committee
The Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration is set 
out on pages 60 to 81.

Conflicts of Interest
The articles of association include provisions giving the 
directors authority to approve conflicts of interest and 
potential conflicts of interest as permitted under the 
Companies Act 2006.

A procedure has been established whereby actual and 
potential conflicts of interest are regularly reviewed and 
appropriate authorisation sought, prior to the appointment of 
any new director or if a new conflict arises. The decision to 
authorise a conflict of interest can only be made by 
non-conflicted directors and in making such a decision the 
directors must act in a way they consider, in good faith, will 
be most likely to promote the success of the company. The 
board believes this procedure operated effectively
throughout the year.

Investor Relations
The group has a comprehensive investor relations (“IR”) 
programme to ensure that current and potential 
shareholders, as well as financial analysts, are kept well 
informed of the group’s performance and have appropriate 
access to management to understand the company’s 
business and strategy.

The board believes it is important to maintain open and 
constructive relationships with all shareholders. The IR team, 
reporting to the group finance director, are responsible for 
managing a structured programme of meetings, calls and 
presentations around the financial reporting calendar as well 
as throughout the year. The chief executive and group 
finance director meet with the group’s major institutional 
shareholders on a regular basis. In addition, the chairman 
arranges to meet with them once a year to discuss 
challenges facing the board, particularly in relation to 
strategy, corporate governance and succession planning. 
Separately the senior independent director is available, 
should shareholders wish to discuss any concerns they
may have.

All shareholders also have the opportunity to raise questions 
with the board at the AGM, either in person or by submitting 
written questions in advance. The chairman of each of the 
board committees attends the AGM and all other directors 
are expected to attend the meeting.

The board is regularly updated on the IR programme. An IR 
report, summarising share price performance, share register 
composition and feedback from any investor meetings, is 
produced for each board meeting.

In November 2015, we ran a successful Banking division 
seminar, providing greater detail to investors and analysts on 
our largest division. This presentation, together with all 
results announcements, annual reports, regulatory news 
announcements and other relevant documents, is available 
on the IR section of the group website (www.closebrothers.
com/investor-relations).

Substantial Shareholdings
The company has been notified to 16 September 2016 under 
the provisions of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules of the following significant interests in the voting rights 
of the company.

Standard Life Investments
M&G Investment Management
Aberdeen Asset Managers
Royal London Asset Management

Ordinary
shares
millions
19.5
10.0
9.5
7.4

Voting
rights
%
13.02
6.81
6.42
4.96

Substantial shareholders do not have different voting rights 
from those of other shareholders.

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual 
Report and the financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the 
directors are required to prepare the group financial 
statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) as adopted by the European 
Union and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. The directors have 
elected to prepare the parent company financial statements 
in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards 
and applicable law), including FRS 102 “The Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of 
Ireland”. Under company law the directors must not approve 
the accounts unless they are satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view of the state of affairs of the company and of the 
profit or loss of the company for that period.

In preparing the parent company financial statements, the 
directors are required to:
•  Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

consistently;

•  Make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent;

•  State whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have 

been followed, subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial statements; and
•  Prepare the financial statements on the going concern 
basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the 
company will continue in business.

In preparing the group financial statements, International 
Accounting Standard 1 requires that directors:
•  Properly select and apply accounting policies;
•  Present information, including accounting policies, in a 

manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

•  Provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 
specific requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable 
users to understand the impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on the entity’s financial 
position and financial performance; and

•  Make an assessment of the company’s ability to continue 

as a going concern.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Corporate Governance continued59

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of the company 
and enable them to ensure that the financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets of the company and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing 
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements 
may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:
•  The financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 
relevant financial reporting framework, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or 
loss of the company and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

•  The Strategic Report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and the 
position of the company and the undertakings included  
in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they 
face; and

•  The Annual Report and financial statements, taken as a 

whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide 
the information necessary for shareholders to assess the 
group’s performance, business model and strategy.

By order of the board

Nicholas Jennings
Company Secretary

27 September 2016

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements60

This report sets out our approach 
to remuneration for the group’s 
employees and directors for the 
2016 financial year.

Bridget Macaskill, Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

This report has been prepared in compliance with Schedule 
8 of the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013 and 
the listing rules. It has been approved by the board. Certain 
parts of this report are audited by the company’s auditor 
Deloitte LLP and are marked as “audited” for clarity.

Annual Statement from the Remuneration  
Committee Chair
On behalf of the Remuneration Committee, I am pleased to 
present the report on directors’ remuneration for the 2016 
financial year. The report which follows is split into three 
sections:

Governance (page 62)
This section of the report covers the objectives, 
responsibilities, membership and activities of the Committee 
during the 2016 financial year.

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy (pages 63 to 71)
The group’s policy on directors’ remuneration and the key 
factors taken into account in setting the policy are covered in 
this section. This policy was approved by shareholders for 
the following three years at the AGM on 20 November 2014.

The Annual Report on Remuneration (pages 71 to 81)
This section reports on the payments and awards made to 
the directors and details the link between company 
performance and remuneration for the 2016 financial year. 
The Annual Report on Remuneration together with this 
annual statement is subject to an advisory shareholder vote 
at the AGM on 17 November 2016.

At a Glance
How we performed
As reported in the Financial Overview section on pages 14 to 
19 of the Strategic Report, the group has achieved a good 
performance in more challenging market conditions, driven 
by the consistent and disciplined implementation of our 
strategy and business model. The group delivered continued 
profit growth and strong returns for shareholders, with 
£233.6 million adjusted operating profit and a return on 
equity (“RoE”) of 18.9%. The key performance indicators with 
regard to remuneration are shown in the table below. While 
profits increased, the financial performance element of the 
bonuses for the executive directors (“EDs”) have decreased 
slightly this year, mainly driven by the marginal reduction in 
RoE. The single total figures of remuneration have all 
decreased, primarily due to the impact of share price 
movement.

Key performance indicator
Return on equity
Adjusted operating profit
Adjusted earnings per 

share growth1 

Total shareholder return  

2016
18.9%

2015
19.5%
£233.6 million £224.9 million

53.8%

79.0%

per annum2

10.0%
Distributions to shareholders £84.1 million

33.9%
£79.0 million

1  For the three year periods ended 31 July 2016 and 31 July 2015.
2  For the three year periods ended 31 July 2016 and 31 July 2015 based on the 

average three month share price prior to that date.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration61

Key developments
Compensation structures need to evolve to meet legal and regulatory requirements, the commercial challenges as well as the 
interests of our shareholders.

It was anticipated that during the 2016 financial year, clarification of how to apply the amendments made to the Capital 
Requirements Directive by the European Banking Authority would impact, and possibly require a redesign of, the 
Remuneration Policy. However, the uncertainty surrounding the UK’s implementation of the Capital Requirements Directive 
has meant we have deferred the redesign of the Remuneration Policy until the 2017 financial year. Please refer to the “Looking 
Forward to 2017” section on page 62 for further information.

During the year we have continued to develop the governance within our remuneration framework, and have provided greater 
disclosure on achievements against both financial targets and personal goals increasing the transparency of how these link to 
EDs’ individual annual bonuses. This is presented on pages 72 to 75.

Senior management succession planning is a key focus of the directors and links into the group’s remuneration policy, which 
sets out the parameters for EDs’ compensation should they leave the business. In light of Stephen Hodges’ decision to retire, 
the compensation paid to him during his notice period and upon leaving the business will be in line with the remuneration 
policy and current views on good governance. Whilst Stephen’s compensation for 2017 has yet to be determined, it has been 
agreed that Stephen will not receive a 2016 LTIP award recognising that he will not be in the business for the majority of the 
long-term performance period.

Major Decisions on Remuneration for the Financial Year

Previous salary
Salary with effect from 1 August 2016
Percentage salary increase
2016 bonus
Percentage change in bonus from 2015
2016 bonus as a per cent of 2016 salary
2016 LTIP award
Percentage change in LTIP award from 

0

2015

2016 LTIP award as a per cent of 2016 

salary

Managing director and 
Banking chief executive 

Chief executive 

Group finance director 
Preben Prebensen Stephen Hodges1 Jonathan Howell
£408,000
£408,000
0.0%
£1,126,080
(0.8)%
276%
£750,000

£485,000
£485,000
0.0%
£1,396,800
(0.6)%
288%
–

£540,000
£540,000
0.0%
£1,545,480
(0.4)%
286%
£1,080,000

Group head of legal 
and regulatory affairs 
Elizabeth Lee2
£367,500
£330,750
0.0%
£335,650
0.2%
91%
£400,000

8.0%

200%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

184%

0.0%

109%

1  Following Stephen Hodges’ decision to retire it has been agreed that no LTIP will be awarded for 2016.
2  Elizabeth Lee’s full time equivalent salary remains at £367,500. Her working pattern changed on 1 August 2016 to 90% of the full time equivalent.

EDs’ Remuneration and Shareholdings
Single total figure of remuneration1

Preben Prebensen
£’000

Stephen Hodges
£’000

Jonathan Howell
£’000

Elizabeth Lee
£’000

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£5,962

63%

£3,771

41%

41%

18%

2016

26%

11%

2015

1  See page 71 for details.

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£4,257

53%

33%

14%

2015

£3,328

40%

42%

18%

2016

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£3,443

52%

33%

15%

2015

£2,827

42%

40%

18%

2016

3,000

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

Fixed remuneration

Annual bonus

Performance awards

£1,561

50%

21%

29%

2015

£1,221

36%

27%

37%

2016

Preben Prebensen
£’000

Stephen Hodges
£’000

Jonathan Howell
£’000

Elizabeth Lee
£’000

8,000

7,000

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£5,962

63%

26%

11%

FY15

£3,768

41%

41%

18%

FY16

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£4,257

53%

33%

14%

FY15

£3,326

40%

42%

18%

FY16

6,000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£3,443

52%

33%

15%

FY15

£2,826

42%

40%

18%

FY16

3,000

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

5,00

0

£1,561

50%

21%

29%

FY15

£1,220

36%

27%

37%

FY16

Fixed remuneration

Annual bonus

Performance awards

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements62

Value of shareholding versus shareholding policy1 as a percentage of salary

Preben Prebensen
per cent

Stephen Hodges
per cent

Jonathan Howell
per cent

Elizabeth Lee
per cent

2,400

2,100

1,800

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

1,729

Actual

200

Policy

2,400

2,100

1,800

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

2,122

200

Policy

Actual

2,400

2,100

1,800

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

200

Policy

619

Actual

1,000

800

600

400

200

0

100

Policy

224

Actual

1  See EDs’ Shareholding and Share Interests table on page 78 for details.

Looking Forward to 2017
2017 is going to be a busy year for the Committee. The focus 
of the year will be to review our remuneration policy, which 
will be presented to shareholders for approval at the AGM in 
November 2017. We are committed to ensuring that the EDs’ 
pay arrangements reflect relevant regulatory requirements 
while supporting and driving business strategy; are balanced 
between motivating and challenging our senior leaders to 
grow the business; and deliver strong sustainable 
shareholder returns. We plan to engage with our major 
shareholders, as appropriate, about any proposed 
amendments to the remuneration structure in the spring of 
2017. 

I hope that you will find this report on the directors’ 
remuneration useful, understandable and clear.

Bridget Macaskill
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

27 September 2016

Governance
Remuneration Committee
Committee roles and responsibilities
The Committee’s key objectives are to:
•  Determine the overarching principles and parameters of 

the remuneration policy on a group-wide basis;
•  Establish and maintain a competitive remuneration 

package to attract, motivate and retain high calibre EDs 
and senior management across the group;

•  Promote the achievement of the group’s annual plans and 

its strategic objectives by providing a remuneration 
package that contains appropriately motivating targets that 
are consistent with the group’s risk appetite; and

•  Ensure that contractual terms on termination and any 

payments made are fair to the individual and the group, 
that failure is not rewarded and that a duty to mitigate risk 
is fully recognised;

•  Review any major changes in employee benefits structures 

throughout the group;

•  Select, appoint and determine terms of reference for 
independent remuneration consultants to advise the 
Committee on remuneration policy and levels of 
remuneration;

•  Ensure that the remuneration structures in the group are 
compliant with the rules and requirements of regulators, 
and all relevant legislation;

•  Ensure that provisions regarding disclosure of 

remuneration are fulfilled; and

•  Seek advice from group control functions to ensure 
remuneration structures and annual bonuses are 
appropriately aligned to the group’s risk appetite.

Membership
The Committee comprises Bridget Macaskill as chairman, 
together with each of the other independent non-executive 
directors. Five meetings were held during the year and a 
record of attendance at meetings is set out on page 48.

The chairman of the board, chief executive, group head of 
human resources and the head of reward and HR operations 
also attend meetings by invitation.

Activity in the 2016 financial year
The Committee has a standing calendar of items within its 
remit. In addition to these standing items, it discusses 
matters relating to the operation of the remuneration policy 
and emerging regulatory and market practices. The key 
issues that the Committee focused on during the year were 
as follows:
•  The review of the annual bonus targets and objectives for 

EDs;

•  Align senior executives’ remuneration with the interests of 

•  Assessment of the vesting of Long Term Incentive Plan 

shareholders.

The Committee’s main responsibilities are to:
•  Review and determine the total remuneration packages of 
EDs and other senior executives in consultation with the 
chairman and chief executive and within the terms of the 
agreed policy;

•  Approve the design and targets of any performance 

(“LTIP”) and Share Matched Plan (“SMP”) awards;

•  Regular reviews of regulatory and legislative changes and 

developments;

•  Review of the design for all share incentive plans;
•  Review of the monitoring and management information for 

employee sales incentive schemes in the group;

•  Initial review of gender pay gap disclosures taking effect in 

2017; and

related pay schemes operated by the group;

•  The annual performance, salary and variable remuneration 

•  Review the design of all employee share incentive plans;

review.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued63

Directors’ Remuneration Policy
This section sets out the company’s remuneration policy for directors and explains each element and how it operates.

The reward structure aims to:
•  Attract, motivate and retain high calibre employees across the group;
•  Reward good performance;
•  Promote the achievement of the group’s annual plans and its long-term strategic objectives;
•  Align the interests of employees with those of all key stakeholders, in particular our shareholders, clients and regulators; and
•  Support effective risk management and promote a positive client conduct culture.

Remuneration Policy for EDs

Element and how it supports 
the company’s short-term and 
long-term strategic objectives
Base salary
Attracts and retains high 
calibre employees.

Reflects the employee’s 
role and experience.

Operation and maximum payable
Set annually based on the individual’s role and 
experience, pay for the broader employee 
population and external factors, where 
applicable.

Increases normally take effect from 1 August.

Paid monthly in cash.

Increases will generally not exceed increases for 
the broader employee population unless there is 
a change in role or responsibility.

Performance framework, recovery and withholding
None.

Benefits
Enables the EDs to 
perform their role 
effectively by contributing 
to their wellbeing and 
security.

Private medical cover.

Health screening.

Life assurance cover.

Income protection cover.

None.

Provides competitive 
benefits consistent with 
the role.

Allowance in lieu of a company car.

The maximum allowance in lieu of a company 
car is £18,000 for the chief executive and 
£12,000 for the other EDs.

Pension
Provides an appropriate 
and competitive level of 
personal and dependant 
retirement benefits.

Other benefits provided from time to time.

Cash allowance in lieu of employer pension 
contributions equal to 22.5% of base salary.

None.

The maximum is 22.5% of base salary and the 
absolute values will only increase in line with any 
base salary increases.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements64

Element and how it supports 
the company’s short-term and 
long-term strategic objectives
Annual bonus
Rewards good 
performance.

Motivates employees 
to support the group’s 
goals, strategies and 
values over both the 
medium and long term.

Aligns the interests of 
senior employees and 
executives with those 
of key stakeholders, 
including shareholders, 
and increases retention 
for senior employees, 
through the use of 
deferrals.

Operation and maximum payable
Set annually based on the achievement of 
pre-determined objectives.

Annual bonus up to 100% of base salary is 
delivered in cash.

Annual bonus above 100% of base salary is 
deferred into group shares vesting one third per 
year over three years.

Shares may be called for at any time up to 12 
months from the date of vesting. When the 
shares are called for, the ED is entitled to the 
gross value of accumulated dividends in respect 
of the shares held under the deferred awards 
prior to calling.

The annual bonus for EDs is capped at 300% of 
base salary.

The annual bonus for the group head of legal 
and regulatory affairs is capped at 100% of base 
salary given that this is a control function, and so 
a lower proportion of the remuneration should 
be variable.

Performance framework, recovery and withholding
Individual bonuses are determined based on 
both financial and non-financial performance, 
including adherence to relevant risk and 
control frameworks.

The financial measure used to determine the 
bonus is RoE. The non-financial metric is 
individual performance. This includes risk, 
compliance and control measures, and others 
applicable to each role. The actual 
performance targets will be set at the 
beginning of each financial year, but will not  
be disclosed in advance for commercial 
sensitivity reasons.

The actual targets set for each year will be 
designed to align the interests of EDs with the 
key stakeholders over the medium term, be 
challenging but also provide an effective 
incentive for the EDs.

60% of the annual bonus for the chief 
executive, the Banking chief executive and the 
group finance director will be determined 
based on RoE. 40% of the annual bonus for 
the group head of legal and regulatory affairs 
will be determined based on RoE. The 
remainder will be determined based on 
individual performance.

Threshold performance would result in a 
bonus of no more than one third of the 
maximum being paid for the chief executive, 
the Banking chief executive and the group 
finance director, and no more than 60% of the 
maximum being paid for the group head of 
legal and regulatory affairs.

The deferred awards would be forfeited if the 
ED leaves employment in certain 
circumstances or is dismissed for cause 
before the relevant vesting date. 

The cash element is subject to clawback and 
the deferred element is subject to malus and 
clawback conditions, as outlined on page 68.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued65

Element and how it supports 
the company’s short-term and 
long-term strategic objectives
Long Term Incentive Plan
Motivates executives 
to achieve the group’s 
longer-term strategic 
objectives.

Aids the attraction and 
retention of key staff.

Aligns executive 
interests with those of 
shareholders.

Operation and maximum payable
Awards are made in the form of nil cost options 
or conditional shares.

Awards vest after three years subject to 
achieving absolute total shareholder returns 
(“TSR”), adjusted earnings per share (“EPS”) 
growth and Risk Management objectives. 

Performance framework, recovery and withholding
Awards vest after three years subject to 
achieving TSR, adjusted EPS growth and Risk 
Management objectives. 

The weighting of the performance measures is 
40% TSR, 40% adjusted EPS and 20% Risk 
Management objectives.

On vesting, EDs receive an amount (in cash or 
shares) equal to the dividends which would have 
been paid on vested shares during the period 
from the beginning of the performance period to 
the time that the ED calls for the award.

The TSR and adjusted EPS performance 
targets are determined at the time of each 
grant, are set to support the objectives of the 
LTIP and be challenging but achievable.

EDs are eligible to receive an annual award of 
shares with a face value of up to 200% of base 
salary, excluding dividend equivalents.

The group head of legal and regulatory affairs is 
eligible to receive an annual award of shares with 
a face value of up to 125% of base salary, 
excluding dividend equivalents, given that this is 
a control function, and so a lower proportion of 
remuneration should be variable.

The Risk Management objectives are: capital 
and balance sheet management; and risk, 
compliance and controls. These two elements 
have equal weighting.

For each element of the award, vesting starts 
at 25% for threshold performance, rising on a 
straight line basis to 100% for maximum 
performance.

The actual target ranges set for each grant 
and performance against the targets at vesting 
will be reported in the Annual Report on 
Remuneration for the relevant financial years. 

The LTIP awards will be forfeited if the ED 
leaves employment in certain circumstances 
or is dismissed for cause before the relevant 
vesting date. 

The LTIP awards are subject to malus and 
clawback conditions, as outlined on page 68.

Share Matching Plan
Aligns the interests of 
executives with those of 
shareholders.

EDs can choose to invest up to a maximum 
value of 100% of base salary from their bonus 
into Close Brothers Group plc shares (“Invested 
SMP Shares”) for three years.

The performance conditions for the Matched 
SMP Shares are the same as the performance 
conditions in respect of the LTIP awards, 
outlined above.

Invested Shares are matched with free matching 
shares (“Matched SMP Shares”) for every 
Invested Share.

The Invested SMP Shares are released in full at 
the end of the three year deferral.

The Matched SMP Shares are subject to 
performance conditions over the three year 
deferral period.

For each performance element of the Matched 
SMP Share award, vesting starts at 25% for 
threshold performance, rising on a straight line 
basis to 100% for maximum performance.

The actual target ranges set for each grant 
and performance against the targets at vesting 
will be reported in the Annual Report on 
Remuneration for the relevant financial years.

On vesting, EDs receive an amount (in cash or 
shares) equal to the dividends which would have 
been paid on vested shares during the period 
from the beginning of the performance period to 
the time that the ED calls for the award.

The maximum matching ratio will be two 
Matched SMP Shares for each Invested Share.

The Invested SMP Shares and Matched SMP 
Shares are forfeited if the ED leaves 
employment in certain circumstances or is 
dismissed for cause before the relevant 
vesting date. 

The Invested SMP Shares and Matched SMP 
Shares are subject to malus and clawback 
conditions, as outlined on page 68.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements66

Element and how it supports 
the company’s short-term and 
long-term strategic objectives
Save As You Earn 
(“SAYE”)
Aligns the interests of 
executives with those of 
shareholders through 
building a shareholding.

Share Incentive Plan 
(“SIP”)
Aligns the interests of 
executives with those of 
shareholders through 
building a shareholding.

Shareholding requirement
Aligns the interests of 
executives with those of 
shareholders.

Other 

Legacy arrangements

Operation and maximum payable
Employees save a fixed amount per month over 
a three or five year timeframe.

Performance framework, recovery and withholding
None, as this is a voluntary scheme where 
employees have invested their own earnings.

At the end of the period employees can 
withdraw all of their savings, or use some or all  
of their savings to buy shares at the guaranteed 
option price.

The option price is set at the beginning of the 
participation period and is usually set at a 20% 
discount to the share price at invitation.

Employees can make total maximum 
contributions of £6,000 per annum, in line with 
HMRC rules.

The Committee reserves the discretion to 
increase the maximum contributions in line with 
any HMRC rule changes during the period of the 
policy.

Employees are able to contribute up to a 
maximum of £1,800 per year from pre-income 
tax and national insurance earnings to buy 
Partnership Shares.

At present the Committee has determined that 
employees have the ability to buy Partnership 
Shares; however it retains the discretion to offer 
Matching Shares of up to twice the number of 
Partnership Shares. This will be on the same 
basis for all employees should the Committee 
exercise this discretion. 

Dividends paid on shares held in the SIP are to 
be reinvested to acquire further Dividend Shares.

The Committee reserves the discretion to 
increase the maximum contributions in line with 
any HMRC rule changes during the period of the 
policy.

The chief executive, the Banking chief executive 
and the group finance director are required to 
build and maintain a shareholding of 200% of 
base salary over a reasonable timeframe. The 
group head of legal and regulatory affairs is 
required to build a shareholding of 100% of base 
salary, given that this is a control function. 
Short-term share price fluctuations are 
disregarded for these calculations.

The company will pay legal, training and other 
reasonable and appropriate fees incurred by the 
EDs as a result of doing their job.

The company has the ability to honour any 
commitments entered into with current or former 
directors that were disclosed to shareholders in 
remuneration reports prior to the 2014 
remuneration report.

The Committee reserves the right to allow 
awards to vest or make payments subject to 
arrangements that were granted or agreed 
before the individual became a director and not 
in contemplation of becoming a director.

None, as this is a voluntary scheme where 
employees have invested their own earnings.

None.

None.

None.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued67

Additional Details on the Remuneration Policy
Annual bonus: Performance measures and targets

Per cent 
determined 
by RoE
60%

Role
Group chief 
executive

Per cent 
determined by 
achievement 
against 

personal goals Examples of personal goals

40% Strategic: Maintain discipline of the Banking division model particularly as competition 

increases and maintain momentum in Asset Management.

People: Develop senior succession and support pipeline talent programmes.

Business delivery: Deliver versus key group metrics.

Banking chief 
executive

60%

40% Strategic: Maintain discipline of funding and lending models and progress strategic 

and tactical initiatives.

Group finance 
director

Group head 
of legal and 
regulatory affairs

People: Develop senior succession and support pipeline talent programmes.

Business delivery: Deliver against key metrics, principally in the Banking division and 
maintain cost discipline and prioritise spending.

60%

40% Strategic: Manage the positioning of our strategy and results with investors and analysts.

Business delivery: Manage the level of group capital, including both regulatory and 
economic.

40%

60% Strategic: Play a leadership role in all regulatory issues, including advice on key 

decisions as we address PRA/FCA requirements and standards.

Risk and compliance: Ensure operation within the agreed risk appetite and continue 
to enhance the control environment and supporting infrastructure.

The above are high level examples of personal goals. Individual personal goals change each year in line with the evolving 
business strategy. Detailed disclosures for the 2016 financial year are provided on pages 73 and 74.

The Committee chose RoE as a performance measure as it aligns the interests of the shareholders and the executives and it 
captures both profit and capital management metrics. Individual performance was selected to ensure that the EDs are 
implementing and executing the group’s strategies and objectives over the short and medium term. Risk, compliance and 
controls are included as part of the personal objectives to ensure that the EDs set the right tone from the top and ensure the 
company maintains the appropriate risk and compliance discipline.

The actual performance targets for each financial year will be set at the beginning of the financial year based on prior year 
performance, the budget for the following year and other internal and external factors as appropriate.

LTIP and SMP: Performance measures
Adjusted EPS was chosen as a performance measure as the Committee believes it is the best measure of long-term 
performance for the group. Absolute TSR was selected as it is the key objective for most of our shareholders and it supports 
both the delivery of a good RoE for shareholders and strong alignment of interests between executives and shareholders. 
Capital and balance sheet management was included to ensure capital is used efficiently and in a disciplined way to support 
the long-term health of the group. Risk, compliance and controls was selected to ensure that the long-term interests of the 
group are protected and to support key requirements for our business such as good customer outcomes.

Additional details on performance measures for the annual bonus, LTIP and SMP
The Committee has the discretion to change the overall weighting of each category over the duration of the policy where it is 
deemed appropriate and reasonable to do so.

The Committee can also make adjustments to performance targets to reflect significant one-off items which occur during the 
measurement period (for example a major transaction), where it is deemed appropriate and reasonable to do so. The 
Committee will make full and clear disclosure of any such adjustments within the Annual Report on Remuneration for the 
relevant financial year.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements68

Malus and clawback
The cash element of the annual bonus is subject to clawback for a period of three years from award. The deferred element 
vests in equal tranches over three years, and is subject to malus prior to vesting and clawback for three years from the date of 
grant.

The LTIP and the Matched SMP shares are subject to malus for the three year period to the point of vesting, and are subject 
to clawback for four years from the date of grant. The Invested SMP shares are subject to malus until vesting and to clawback 
for three years from the date of grant.

The events which may trigger malus are as follows:
•  The ED’s employment is terminated for misconduct or the ED is issued with a formal disciplinary warning for misconduct 

under the firm’s disciplinary policy; or 

•  The firm suffers a material loss where the ED has operated outside the risk parameters or risk profile applicable to their 

position and as such the Committee considers a material failure in risk management has occurred; or 

•  The level of the award is not sustainable when assessing the overall financial viability of the firm.

In the event that one of these is triggered, the Committee may, at its discretion, defer and/or reduce, in whole or in part any 
unvested award.

The events which may trigger clawback are as follows:
•  Discovery of a material mis-statement resulting in an adjustment in the audited consolidated accounts of the company, or 

the audited accounts of any material subsidiary; or

•  The assessment of any performance target or condition in respect of an award was based on material error, or materially 

inaccurate or misleading information; or

•  The discovery that any information used to determine the bonus and number of shares subject to an award was based on 

material error, or materially inaccurate or misleading information; or

•  Action or conduct of a participant which, in the reasonable opinion of the board, amounts to fraud or gross misconduct.

In the event that one of these is triggered, the Committee may require the ED to repay all or part of a relevant award, and any 
associated dividend equivalents.

Consistency of executive remuneration across the group
The pay and employment conditions of employees within the group were taken into consideration when setting the policy and 
pay of the EDs. The Committee does not formally consult with employees when setting the policy, although the employee 
opinion survey conducted every two years includes remuneration as one of the topics surveyed.

The principles of remuneration are applied throughout the group and are designed to support the group’s key attributes 
across our businesses, which are expertise, service and relationships. Remuneration structures and arrangements for 
employees below the EDs are based on the individual’s role, experience, performance and relevant market practice.

Annual bonuses for those below ED level are based on role, business performance, market conditions and individual 
performance. These bonuses are not capped; however highly remunerated employees have a portion of their bonus deferred. 
For the majority of employees the bonus deferral policy is in line with the EDs, although there are differing approaches in some 
parts of the group.

A limited group of senior employees receive LTIP awards, generally on the same basis as the EDs, but the maximum face 
value of these awards is generally at or below the level of the employee’s base salary.

Members of the group Executive Committee who are not EDs are required to build and maintain shareholdings of at least one 
times base salary and as such are also eligible to participate in the SMP.

All UK employees are eligible to participate in the SAYE and SIP plans.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued69

Illustrations of Application of Remuneration Policy for EDs 

Preben Prebensen
£’000

Stephen Hodges
£’000

Jonathan Howell
£’000

Elizabeth Lee1
£’000

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

£686

£4,466

£2,835

49%

38%

38%

36%

100%

24%

15%

0

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£4,008

£2,464

48%

36%

39%

25%

36%

15%

£613

100%

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£3,374

49%

36%

15%

£2,099

36%

39%

25%

£518

100%

5,000

4,000

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

£1,171
41%
23%
36%

£424
100%

£1,830

59%

18%
23%

Minimum On target Maximum

Minimum On target Maximum

Minimum On target Maximum

Minimum On target Maximum

Fixed remuneration

Annual bonus

Performance awards

1  Elizabeth Lee’s working pattern changed on 1 August 2016 to 90% of the full time equivalent.

The following assumptions were made in developing the scenarios:

Element
Fixed remuneration Consists of 2017 base salary, 2017 benefits and 2017 pension allowance.

Assumptions used

Minimum 

On target

No variable elements are awarded.

Annual bonus: Awarded at 200% of base salary for all EDs, with the exception of Elizabeth Lee, where 
the award is 80% of base salary. 

LTIP: Awards with a face value of £1,080,000 for Preben Prebensen, £850,000 for Stephen Hodges, 
£750,000 for Jonathan Howell and £400,000 for Elizabeth Lee (the level of the 2016 financial year 
awards) and vesting at 66% (average level of vesting for the five years up to and including 2015).

SMP: The ED invests 50% of the policy maximum in the SMP, the investment is matched at two times 
the Invested Shares and vests at 66% (average level of vesting for the five years up to and including 2015).

Maximum

Annual bonus: Awarded at policy maximum (300% of base salary for all EDs, with the exception of 
Elizabeth Lee, where the policy maximum is 100% of base salary).

LTIP: Maximum award with a face value equal to 200% of base salary for all EDs with the exception of 
Elizabeth Lee where the award is 125% of salary. Assumes 100% vesting.

SMP: The executive invests 100% of the maximum in the SMP (that is equal to 100% of base salary), the 
investment is matched at two times the Invested Shares and vests at 100%.

Other

No adjustment for share price growth or dividends paid.

At maximum performance, the ratio of financial to non-financial measures for the EDs across the annual bonus, LTIP and SMP 
is approximately 70% to 30%. The Committee believes this combination provides a good balance of financial and non-
financial measures, supports the medium and long-term strategic objectives of the group, and alignment of EDs’ and 
shareholders’ interests.

Approach to Recruitment Remuneration
The remuneration package for new EDs will comply with the Remuneration Policy for EDs outlined on pages 63 to 66. The 
Committee will seek to pay no more than is necessary to secure the right candidate. The Committee may seek to “buy out” 
remuneration that the director forfeits as a result of joining the company. In such cases, the Committee will seek to replace this 
with awards that match the quantum and terms of the forfeited awards as closely as possible. There may be situations where 
a new director has to relocate in order to take up the post with the company. In such situations reasonable financial and/or 
practical support will be provided to enable the relocation. This may include the cost of any tax that is incurred as a result of 
the move.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements70

Service Contracts and Policy for Payment on Loss of Office

Standard provision
Notice period 

Policy
12 months’ notice from the company.
12 months’ notice from the ED.

Compensation for loss of 
office in service contracts

No more than 12 months’ salary, pension 
allowance and benefits.

Treatment of annual bonus 
on termination

The standard approach is no payment 
unless employed on date of payment. 

Treatment of unvested 
deferred awards under the 
annual bonus plan and the 
Invested SMP Shares

The Committee has the discretion under 
the relevant plan rules to determine 
whether “good leaver” status should be 
applied on termination.
The current approach provides that 
discretion may be afforded in cases such 
as death, disability, retirement, redundancy 
or mutual separation.

Treatment of the LTIP and 
the Matched SMP Shares

All awards lapse except for “good leavers”.
The Committee has the discretion under 
the relevant plan rules to determine how 
“good leaver” status should be applied on 
termination.
The current approach provides that 
discretion may be afforded in cases such 
as death, disability, retirement, redundancy 
or mutual separation.

Outside appointments

EDs may accept external appointments.

Details
EDs may be required to work during the notice 
period or may be provided with pay in lieu of notice if 
not required to work the full period.
All EDs are subject to annual re-election by 
shareholders.

Payment will be commensurate with the company’s 
legal obligations and we will seek appropriate 
mitigation of loss by the ED.

The Committee may award a pro-rated bonus to 
“good leavers” (as determined by the Committee) in 
certain circumstances, although there is no 
automatic entitlement. “Good leaver” status may be 
granted in cases such as death, disability or 
retirement. 
The Committee has discretion to reduce the 
entitlement of a “good leaver” in line with 
performance, the circumstances of the termination, 
and the malus conditions outlined in the policy table. 
The Committee also has the ability to recover annual 
bonuses in line with the clawback conditions 
outlined in the policy table.

Where the director is designated a “good leaver”, 
awards vest in full over the original schedule and 
remain subject to the malus conditions.
The deferred shares are released in full in the event 
of a change in control.
Awards lapse in the event the employee is declared 
bankrupt, joins another financial services company 
within 12 months of termination (unless this 
condition is waived under “good leaver” status), or 
leaves and is not designated a “good leaver”. 
These are also subject to the clawback conditions.

For “good leavers”, vesting is pro-rated for the 
period of employment during the performance 
period.
Vesting is subject to the achievement over the 
original performance period against the 
performance targets and is on the original schedule.
Awards remain subject to the malus and clawback 
conditions.
In the event of a change in control, the awards will 
vest subject to the service factor and the 
achievement against the performance targets at that 
point. However, the Committee retains the discretion 
to increase the amount vesting depending on the 
circumstances of the change in control.

Board approval must be sought before accepting 
the appointment.
The fees may be retained by the director.

Chairman and non-
executive directors

Other

Engaged under letters of appointment for 
terms not exceeding three years.
Renewable by mutual agreement and can 
be terminated on one month’s notice.

All non-executive directors are subject to annual 
re-election.
No compensation is payable if required to stand 
down.

The company may pay settlement 
payments, legal, training and outplacement 
fees incurred on exit, if appropriate.

Other notable provisions in 
service contracts

There are no other notable provisions in 
the service contracts.

Copies of the directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the company’s registered 
office.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continuedDates of EDs’ Service Contracts

Name
Preben Prebensen
Stephen Hodges
Jonathan Howell
Elizabeth Lee

71

Date of service contract
9 February 2009
22 January 2001
8 October 2007
1 August 2012

Remuneration Policy for the Chairman and Independent Non-executive Directors

Element and how it supports the 
company’s short-term and long-term 
strategic objectives
Fees
Attract and retain a 
chairman and independent 
non-executive directors who 
have the requisite skills and 
experience to determine the 
strategy of the group and 
oversee its implementation. 

Operation and maximum payable
Fees are paid in cash and are reviewed periodically.
Fees for the chairman and non-executive directors are set by the board based on a 
recommendation from the Nomination and Governance Committee. The non-executive 
directors do not participate in that decision.
The chairman of the board receives a fee as chairman but receives no other fees for 
chairmanship or membership of any committees.
Non-executive directors receive a base fee.
The senior independent director receives an additional fee for this role.
Additional fees are paid for chairmanship of each of the Audit, Remuneration and Risk 
Committees.
Additional fees are paid for membership of committees, with the exception of the Nomination 
and Governance Committee, for which no additional fees are payable.
The chairman and non-executive directors are entitled to claim reimbursement for reasonable 
expenses incurred performing their duties for the company, including travel expenses.
Overall aggregate fees will remain within the £1 million authorised by our articles of 
association.
There is no performance framework, recovery or withholding.

Non-executive Directors’ Appointment Letters

Name
Oliver Corbett
Geoffrey Howe
Lesley Jones
Bridget Macaskill
Strone Macpherson

Date of appointment
3 June 2014
4 January 2011
23 December 2013
21 November 2013
3 March 2003

Current letter of appointment start date
20 November 2014
20 November 2014
20 November 2014
20 November 2014
20 November 2014

Consideration of Shareholders’ Views
The chairman of the board consults our major shareholders on a regular basis on key issues, including remuneration. The 
Committee took issues of concern raised by shareholders in prior years into account when determining the policy. 

Annual Report on Remuneration
This section explains how our Directors’ Remuneration Policy was implemented during 2016.

Single Total Figure of Remuneration for EDs (Audited)

Name
Preben Prebensen
Stephen Hodges
Jonathan Howell
Elizabeth Lee3

Salary

Benefits

Annual bonus1

Performance awards2

Pension

Total

2016
£’000
540
485
408
353

2015
£’000
528
475
400
360

2016
£’000
20
13
13
14

2015
£’000

2016
£’000
20 1,545
13
1,397
14
1,126
13
336

2015
£’000

2016
£’000
1,552 1,545
1,405
1,324
1,135
1,188
335
436

2015
£’000
3,743
2,257
1,804
772

2016
£’000
121
109
92
82

2015
2016
£’000
£’000
119
3,771
107 3,328
90 2,827
81
1,221

2015
£’000
5,962
4,257
3,443
1,561

1  Any amount of annual bonus above 100% of base salary is deferred into group shares. 
2  The figures for the performance awards for 2015 have been re-calculated using the actual share price on the dates of vesting for the LTIP and Matched SMP shares. 
These were £15.17 for LTIP and Matched SMP Shares. The three month average to 31 July 2015 was used for the 2015 report given that the awards were vesting 
after publication of the report.

3  Elizabeth Lee’s salary was £367,500 with effect from 1 August 2015, however a reduced amount was paid due to a short period of unpaid leave.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements72

Link between reward and performance
The group’s financial results have been good this year, and over the past three years. Adjusted operating profit has increased 
4% in the year to £233.6 million, and it has grown 40% or 12% per annum compounded over the last three financial years. 
RoE has remained strong at 18.9% this year, and is up from 15.8% in 2013. Dividend growth was 7% this year with dividend 
cover remaining at 2.3 times up from 1.9 times in 2013.

The strong RoE has been reflected in the EDs’ bonuses, with the element of the bonus determined based on RoE being 
93.3% of the potential maximum. The compounded adjusted EPS growth of 15.4% over the last three years has resulted in 
the EPS element of the LTIP vesting at 100%. The compounded TSR of 10.0% per annum has met the threshold target under 
the LTIP and vested at 25.1%. The very strong approach to capital management combined with a good performance in risk, 
compliance and controls mean that the Risk Management objectives element vested at 89.2%. As a result, the LTIP will vest 
at 67.9% this year.

Additional Disclosures on the Single Total Figure of Remuneration for EDs Table (Audited)
Salary
The per annum salaries paid during the year are as shown in the single total figure of remuneration table shown on page 71. 
The increase between 2015 and 2016 was with effect from 1 August 2015. When reviewing salary levels, the Committee takes 
into account the individual’s role and experience, pay for the broader employee population and external factors, where 
applicable. There were no salary increases awarded for the 2017 financial year.

Benefits
The EDs each received an allowance in lieu of a company car. Preben Prebensen received £18,000 while the others received 
£12,000. These allowances have not been increased since 2012. They also received private health cover. The discount to the 
share price on grant of SAYE options is included in the year of grant. 

Pension
The EDs all received a monthly cash pension allowance equivalent to 22.5% of base salary. They do not receive any additional 
pension provision.

Annual bonus: Achievement against targets 
The bonuses for EDs were determined with reference to RoE targets and stretching personal goals relevant to each ED’s role 
and business accountabilities. The RoE for the 2016 financial year was 18.9% against a maximum target of 20%, warranting 
an award of 93.3% of the potential maximum bonus for this element. Any annual bonus above the level of the 2016 base 
salary was deferred into group shares vesting one third per year over three years in line with the approach outlined in the 
Remuneration Policy on page 64.

Achievement Against Annual Bonus Targets

Financial target (RoE)

Personal goals

Name
Preben Prebensen
Stephen Hodges
Jonathan Howell
Elizabeth Lee

Weighting
60%
60%
60%
40%

Threshold 
(33.33% of 
potential 
maximum)
12%
12%
12%
12%

Target 
(66.67% of 
potential 
maximum)
15%
15%
15%
15%

Potential 
maximum 
(100% of 
potential 
maximum)
20%
20%
20%
20%

Actual RoE
(93.3% of 
potential 
maximum)

Actual 
amount 
awarded 

(’000s) Weighting

19% £907
19% £815
19% £685
19% £137

Potential 
maximum 
(’000s)
40% £648
40% £582
40% £490
60% £221

Actual 
Total 
Actual 
amount 
bonus 
per cent 
awarded 
awarded 
awarded
(’000s)
(’000s)
98.5% £638 £1,545
100.0% £582 £1,397
90.0% £441 £1,126
£336
90.0% £199

Annual bonus: Personal goals for the 2016 financial year 
Performance for each individual is assessed against a balanced scorecard of strategic, people, business delivery and risk and 
control objectives. These objectives are agreed with the Committee at the start of each financial year, and are designed to be 
stretching for the individual and the business while maintaining consistency and stability in the group’s strategy, business 
model and performance.

Performance against each individual’s objectives is assessed by the Committee taking into account a combination of 
qualitative and quantitative measures, as well as feedback from key stakeholders.

In the last year, all four EDs achieved strong performance against their individual objectives – as evidenced by the consistent 
execution of our strategy, continued strong financial performance and outperformance of our TSR against the majority of the 
domestic UK banking sector during the financial year.

A summary of the EDs’ personal objectives and achievements which were considered by the Committee for the 2016 financial 
year is set out on pages 73 and 74. For reasons of commercial sensitivity, not all performance criteria can be disclosed.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued73

Examples of Personal Goals for the 2016 Financial Year

Objective
Preben Prebensen, Group Chief Executive
Execute group strategy

Achievement

•  Preben Prebensen has continued to provide strong leadership over the course of the year, 

promoting and supporting the effective and consistent application of the group’s strategy and 
business model across all its businesses. This has resulted in good financial performance with 
adjusted operating profit growth of 4% to £233.6 million against a backdrop of more challenging 
market conditions.

•  Comprehensive review of the group’s business model concluded that the group’s long-term 
strategy, focused on building sustainable positions in specialist market segments, remains 
appropriate and is fully supported by the board and embedded in the business.

•  Maintained the discipline around implementation of the business model across the business, 

with focus on margins, returns and effective underwriting processes and controls supported by 
a prudent risk culture. As a result loan book growth of 12% was achieved while maintaining 
credit metrics well within limits and stable key performance indicators.

•  Ongoing progress in new business initiatives and investment in premium finance lead to 

improved growth and business performance.

•  Increased the strength of our brand through targeted advertising campaigns and sponsorship, 

which have significantly enhanced brand visibility with key client audiences.

•  Developed comprehensive succession plans for the Banking division senior team, ensuring 

stability and continuity in leadership.

•  Successful transition of leadership at Winterflood to Philip Yarrow.
•  Developed a new leadership competency framework to support the development of key senior 
talent and to support the long-term performance of the business both now and in the future.

•  The group continued to operate within its risk appetite and remained compliant with regulatory 

obligations throughout the year.

Ensure robust succession 
plans across key functions

Ensure group maintains 
regulatory compliance, 
with appropriate 
governance

Stephen Hodges, Banking Chief Executive
Drive strategic and tactical 
initiatives in the Banking 
division while maintaining 
the discipline of our 
funding and lending 
models

•  Stephen Hodges has continued to deliver effective and consistent leadership of the Banking 

division, with a strong focus on driving strategic initiatives while maintaining the discipline of our 
differentiated lending model as the Banking division delivered its seventh successive year of 
operating profit growth, up 7% to £223.0 million.

•  Maintained discipline of the lending model in a period of enhanced competition; core metrics 
have remained strong and consistent with our disciplined model with net interest margin at 
8.2%, bad debt at 0.6% and return on net loan book of 3.6%.

•  Identified and actioned a significant number of key strategic initiatives in the year, maintaining 

strong momentum in existing initiatives.

•  Commitment to differentiated and service led proposition emphasised in a range of internal and 

external communications and evidenced by strong customer feedback and net promoter 
scores.

•  Maintained distinctive approach to funding and liquidity, upholding “borrow long, lend short” 

principle while improving diversity of funding with a new public securitisation, private placements 
and growth in corporate deposits.

Maintaining cost discipline 
while protecting key 
investment initiatives

•  Progressed all key investment initiatives while maintaining a strong focus on cost. This included 

the introduction of additional measures to manage the rate of cost progression through the year, 
such as phasing of key investment decisions and restrictions on new hires.

Succession planning and 
talent development

•  Established comprehensive talent and succession plan for senior roles to support the 

development and retention of key talent within the business. This includes the restructuring of 
credit roles to enhance succession and the establishment of a new Training Academy to 
develop the next generation of specialist sales talent.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements74

Objective
Jonathan Howell, Group Finance Director
Set and execute the 
group’s financial strategy

Achievement

•  Jonathan Howell has outlined a clear financial strategy, including three year projections for 

business and group performance and balance sheet metrics. Supported by robust forecasting 
and scenario analysis he continues to effectively implement that strategy ensuring prudent 
management of the group’s financial resources.

Manage the positioning of 
our strategy with investors 
and analysts

Lead high quality group 
finance functions

•  Maintained strong capital ratios for the group, comfortably ahead of minimum regulatory 

requirements, with CET1 ratio of 13.5% and leverage ratio at 10.2%.

•  Performed accurate and effective modelling of capital including stress tests and scenario 
analysis, which underpins confidence in the group’s capital position from shareholders, 
regulators and rating agencies.

•  Established and implemented consistent and long-term dividend policy with strong support from 
board, shareholders and sell-side analysts, supporting sixth consecutive year of dividend growth 
with prudent cover of 2.3 times in the 2016 financial year.

•  Ongoing dialogue and engagement with shareholders, strengthening support for the company 

and its implementation of strategy.

•  Maintained straightforward and consistent shareholder communications, with consistency in 

financial reporting and key performance measures.

•  Differentiation of Close Brothers’ specialist, high margin model understood and valued by 

investors and analysts as evidenced in strong price to book and price earnings ratios compared 
to the domestic UK banking sector.

•  High quality, consistent and timely management reporting to board, chief executive, Executive 
Committee and control functions, used as basis for planning, measurement, forecasting and 
decision making.

•  Accurate and reliable budgeting and forecasting supporting “no surprises” culture and 

performance.

•  Implemented succession plans developed for all key finance roles, to ensure development and 

retention of key talent.

Elizabeth Lee, Group Head of Legal and Regulatory Affairs
Play a leadership role in all 
legal and regulatory issues

legal and regulatory issues.

•  Elizabeth Lee has continued to provide effective leadership and support to the business on all 

•  Overseen the successful implementation of Senior Managers Regime, effective preparation for 
the introduction of the Market Abuse Regulation and changes in data protection regulations.

•  Delivered legal support for new business initiatives including premium finance investment 

programme, development of the retail finance business and M&A activity.

Review the group’s  
insurance provision

•  Led full assessment of group insurance cover requirements alongside scope and cost of group 
financial lines insurances resulting in both reduced cost and wider cover, including additional 
cover for cyber risks.

Manage and monitor legal 
and regulatory risk

•  Legal and regulatory risks have remained well managed and clearly communicated to the 

executive team and board.

•  Completed overhaul of management information in relation to Conduct Risk, in partnership with 

the group risk function.

Performance awards
The performance awards in the single total figure of remuneration include the 2013 LTIP grant and the 2013 Matched SMP 
Shares. Both of these will vest on 1 October 2016.

The performance targets for the 2013 awards vesting in 2016 were weighted 40% adjusted EPS, 40% absolute TSR and 20% 
Risk Management objectives. The adjusted EPS targets were RPI +3% per annum to RPI +10% per annum and the absolute 
TSR targets were +10% per annum to +20% per annum. Compounded adjusted EPS growth over the three year period to 
2016 was a very good 15.4% per annum, while the TSR was 10.0% per annum, meaning the EPS element will vest at 100% 
and the TSR element will vest at 25.1%. The Risk Management objectives of the 2013 LTIP and Matched SMP Shares were 
assessed at 89.2% by the Committee. More details on the rationale for the assessment are provided in the table on page 75. 
Accordingly, the 2013 LTIP and Matched SMP Shares will vest at 67.9%. The LTIP and SMP awards vested at 97.3% in 2015.

The share price for the LTIP and Matched SMP Shares increased by 4% over the three year period from the date of grant to 
the end of the performance period. The average share price used to value the awards due to vest in October 2016 was 
1,211.4p (from 1 May 2016 to 31 July 2016, which was the performance measurement period). The 2013 LTIP and SMP 
awards were originally granted at 1,168.2p. While the increase in share price remains positive over the performance period, 
the single total figure of remuneration for the EDs are down from the previous year, primarily due to the slowdown in share 
price growth.

The performance awards also include the amount (in cash or shares) equal to the dividends which would have been paid 
during the period from the beginning of the performance period to the time that the awards vest. The good, progressive 
dividend payout also contributed to the single total figures of remuneration.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued75

The Committee assessed performance against the Risk Management objectives after each of the three years of the LTIP 
performance period. The results of each assessment are shown in the table below.

Details of the Assessment of the Risk Management Objectives for the LTIP and SMP

Performance measure
Capital and balance 
sheet management

Risk, compliance 
and controls

Year one 
assessment 
100%

Year two 
assessment 
100%

Year three 
assessment 
100%

Overall 
vesting  Comments
100% Capital, balance sheet management, funding and liquidity 

were very strong in the 2016 financial year.
The group continues to maintain a strong, straightforward 
and transparent balance sheet. This was demonstrated in 
the 2016 financial year when Moody’s Investor Services 
confirmed our credit ratings were unchanged following an 
upgrade in the 2015 financial year. 
Funding position remains strong with significant and 
widening diversity within the sources of our funding.

70%

80%

85% 78.3% Regulatory relationships remain good with both the PRA and 

FCA.
Resource and capabilities across risk have been upgraded 
and enhanced.
The Committee noted good progress has been made across 
all areas of risk, compliance and controls.

Overall vesting

89.2%

Details of the Overall Vesting for the LTIP and SMP

Performance measure
Adjusted EPS growth
TSR

Risk Management objectives
Overall vesting

Threshold target
RPI +3% p.a.
+10% p.a.

Maximum target
RPI +10% p.a.
+20% p.a.

n/a

n/a

Actual achieved
15.4% p.a.
10.01% p.a.
As per the 
table above

Overall vesting
100%
25.05%

89.2%
67.9%

Historical Vesting of LTIP Awards Compared to Adjusted EPS and Absolute TSR
The following graph and table show the level of LTIP vesting following performance testing for the last five years.

Adjusted EPS and TSR

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

97%

95%

79%

68%

25%

LTIP vesting %

100

80

60

40

20

0

2009 award
1
vested 2012

2010 award
vested 2013

2

2011 award
2
vested 2014

2012 award
2
vested 2015

2013 award
vested 2016

2

TSR

Adjusted EPS

LTIP vesting

1  Vesting was subject to one third adjusted EPS, one third absolute TSR and one third Strategic Goals for all awards granted between 2009 and 2011, inclusive.
2  Vesting was subject to 40% adjusted EPS, 40% absolute TSR and 20% Risk Management objectives for the 2012 and 2013 awards.

Note: This graph shows the vesting percentage of the LTIP compared with the adjusted EPS rebased to 100 at 31 July 2011, and the TSR based on £100 invested in 
Close Brothers Group plc on 31 July 2011.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements76

LTIP Vesting for the Last Five Years

Year awarded
20091
20101
20111
20122
20132

Year vested
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016

Adjusted EPS
–
66% 
100%
100%
100%

Vesting percentage

TSR
– 
92% 
100% 
100%
25%

Goals
76% 
80% 
85% 
87%
89%

Total 
25% 
79% 
95% 
97%
68%

1  Vesting was subject to one third adjusted EPS, one third absolute TSR and one third Strategic Goals for all awards granted between 2009 and 2011, inclusive.
2  Vesting was subject to 40% adjusted EPS, 40% absolute TSR and 20% Risk Management objectives for the 2012 and 2013 awards.

Performance Graph
The graph below shows a comparison of TSR for the company’s shares for the seven years ended 31 July 2016 against the 
TSR for the companies comprising the FTSE 250 Index. TSR has been calculated assuming that all dividends are reinvested 
on their ex-dividend date. The index has been selected because the company has been a constituent of the index throughout 
the period. The closing mid-market price of the company’s shares on 29 July 2016 was 1,260p and the range during the year 
was 990p to 1,547p.

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

July 2009

July 2010

July 2011

July 2012

July 2013

 July 2014 

 July 2015 

 July 2016 

Source: Thomson Reuters Datastream.

Close Brothers TSR

FTSE 250 TSR

Note: This graph shows the value, by 31 July 2016, of £100 invested in Close Brothers Group plc on 31 July 2009 compared with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE 
250 Index. The other points plotted are the intervening financial year ends.

Chief Executive: Historical Information (Audited)

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

20151

2016

Preben Prebensen
Single figure of total remuneration 

(’000)2

Annual bonus against maximum 

opportunity

LTIP, SMP and Matching Share 

Award vesting

£1,890

£2,187

£2,496

£5,748

£7,411

£5,962

£3,771

90%

33%

95%

33%

90%

25%

100%

100%

79%

95%

98%

97%

95%

68%

1  The figures for the performance awards for 2015 have been re-calculated using the actual share price on the dates of vesting for the LTIP and Matched SMP shares. 
These were £15.17 for LTIP and Matched SMP Shares. As highlighted in the 2015 report, the three month average to 31 July 2015 was used for the 2014 report 
given that the awards were vesting after publication of the report.

2  The figures for 2011 to 2014 include the Matching Share Awards that were granted in 2009 at the time of Preben Prebensen’s appointment as chief executive. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued77

Change in Remuneration of the Chief Executive
The following table shows how the remuneration of the chief executive increased compared to the general employee 
population for the 2016 financial year. The Committee deemed it appropriate for Preben Prebensen to receive a salary 
increase below that received by the general employee population. The change in bonus for Preben Prebensen reflects the 
achievement against the RoE and personal goals targets, outlined on page 72. The reduction in average bonus for the general 
employee population primarily reflects increasing headcount as shown on pages 100 and 101 and the reduction in trading 
income in Winterflood, leading to a reduction in bonuses in that division. The average decrease in bonus for the general 
employee population excluding Winterflood was 2%.

Preben Prebensen
All employee population 

Average change 
in salary for 2016 
(from 1 August 2015)1
2%
4%

Average change 
in benefits for 2016 
(from 1 August 2015)2
2%
4%

Average change 
in annual bonus 
for 20163
(0.4)%
(9)%

1  Calculated as the average percentage increase in salary for those eligible for an increase at 1 August 2015.
2  Calculated as the average percentage increase in benefits for those eligible for a salary increase at 1 August 2015.
3  The percentage increase in the average bonus calculated as the total bonus spend divided by the average headcount for financial years 2015 and 2016.

Relative Importance of Spend on Pay
The following table shows the total remuneration paid compared to the total distributions to shareholders.

Remuneration paid
Distributions to shareholders1

1 

Interim dividend paid and final dividend proposed for the financial year.

2016 
£ million
257.1
84.1

2015 
£ million
248.4
79.0

Scheme Interests Awarded During the Year (Audited)
The face value and key details of the share awards granted in the 2016 financial year are shown in the table below. These 
were all delivered as nil cost options. The Deferred Share Award (“DSA”) is a mandatory deferral of a portion of the annual 
bonus. The share price used to calculate the number of shares awarded was £14.934, the average mid-market closing price 
for the five days prior to grant.

Name
Preben Prebensen

Stephen Hodges

Jonathan Howell

Elizabeth Lee

Award type 
DSA1
LTIP
SMP – Invested
SMP – Matching
DSA1
LTIP
SMP – Invested
SMP – Matching
DSA1
LTIP
SMP – Invested
SMP – Matching
DSA1
LTIP
SMP – Invested
SMP – Matching

Vesting period
1–3 years
3 years
3 years
3 years
1–3 years
3 years
3 years
3 years
1–3 years
3 years
3 years
3 years
1–3 years
3 years
3 years
3 years

Performance 
conditions
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes

Face value 
‘000
£496
£1,000
£528
£1,056
£468
£850
£462
£924
£335
£750
£400
£800
—
£400
£200
£400

Percentage 
vesting at 
threshold
n/a
25%
n/a
25%
n/a
25%
n/a
25%
n/a
25%
n/a
25%
n/a
25%
n/a
25%

1  The DSA vests one third per year over three years.

Number of
shares
33,213
66,962
35,356
70,712
31,338
56,918
30,937
61,874
22,433
50,221
26,785
53,570

Vesting/
performance 
period end date
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
— 29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18
29 Sep 18

26,785
13,393
26,786

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements78

Performance conditions
During the year, the Committee undertook an extensive review of the adjusted EPS and absolute TSR growth targets and 
determined that the targets for the LTIP and Matched SMP Share award grants this year should be unchanged from the 2015 
grants, as outlined in the table below. The Committee believes these are appropriately stretching and effectively align the 
executives’ interests with those of shareholders.

Element 
Absolute TSR1
Adjusted EPS1

1  There is straight-line vesting between the threshold and maximum targets.

Threshold vesting 
(25% vests)
+10% p.a.
RPI +3% p.a.

Maximum vesting 
(100% vests)
+20% p.a. or greater
RPI +10% p.a. or greater

External Appointments
Jonathan Howell received £77,000 in fees (2015: £77,000) from The Sage Group plc during the Close Brothers 2016 financial 
year. None of the other EDs held any external directorships during the year.

Payments to Past Directors (Audited)
There were no payments to past directors after they had left office during the year.

Payments for Loss of Office (Audited)
There were no payments made to directors for loss of office during the year.

Statement of Voting on the Remuneration Report at the 2014 AGM

Directors' Remuneration Policy

Statement of Voting on the Remuneration Report at the 2015 AGM

Annual Report on Remuneration

For
92.5%

Against
7.5%

Number of 
abstentions
5,247,011

For
93.2%

Against
6.8%

Number of 
abstentions
8,414,009

The primary reasons cited for the votes against and actions taken in response are as follows:

Reason
Adjusted EPS targets in the LTIP not 
challenging enough against analyst 
forecasts

Action taken by the Committee
The EPS targets were reviewed this year and not adjusted, as outlined above. 
The Committee believes these targets are challenging and align with the 
company’s long-term strategic objectives.
Analyst forecasts frequently assume a continuation of the current strong 
performance, and while they are used as a point of reference, they are not an 
appropriate measure to be used in isolation. 

Level of disclosure on annual bonus 
determination

We have improved the level of disclosure about the determination of annual 
bonuses. Please see pages 71 to 75.

EDs’ Shareholding and Share Interests (Audited)
The interests of the directors in the ordinary shares of the company at 31 July 2016 are set out below:

Name
Preben Prebensen
Stephen Hodges
Jonathan Howell
Elizabeth Lee

Shareholding 
requirement at 
31 July 
20161
85,715
76,985
64,762
29,167

Number 
of shares 
owned 
outright2
 2016
740,947
816,747
200,577
65,292

Outstanding share  
awards not subject to 
performance conditions3

Outstanding share  
awards subject to  
performance conditions4

2016
173,521
168,769
125,752
35,946

2015
202,683
176,909
115,276
33,273

2016
446,337
386,028
339,234
156,622

2015
540,919
407,323
347,403
150,992

Outstanding options5

2016
1,745
—
—
1,745

2015
1,745
—
—
1,745

1  Based on the closing mid-market share price of 1,260p on 31 July 2016.
2  This includes shares owned outright by closely associated persons.
3  This includes DSA and SMP Invested Shares.
4  This includes LTIP awards and Matched SMP Shares.
5  This comprises SAYE options. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued 
 
79

No EDs held shares that were vested but unexercised at 31 July 2016. There were no changes in notifiable interests between 
31 July 2016 and 16 September 2016, other than the purchases by Preben Prebensen and Elizabeth Lee within the SIP which 
increased their shareholdings to 740,969 shares and 65,422 shares respectively.

Details of EDs’ Share Exercises During the Year (Audited)

Award type

Stephen Hodges

Held at 
1 August
Name
28,549
Preben Prebensen 2013 DSA
35,890
2014 DSA
113,150
2012 LTIP
2012 SMP – Invested
59,553
2012 SMP – Matched 119,106
49,675
2013 DSA
32,322
2014 DSA
91,949
2012 LTIP
24,069
2012 SMP – Invested
48,138
2012 SMP – Matched
19,414
2013 DSA
24,137
2014 DSA
88,138
2012 LTIP
11,911
2012 SMP – Invested
23,822
2012 SMP – Matched
37,221
2012 LTIP
10,720
2012 SMP – Invested
10,720
2012 SMP – Matched

Jonathan Howell

Elizabeth Lee

Called1
14,252
23,926
110,129
59,553
115,926
24,799
21,547
89,494
24,069
46,853
9,691
17,140
85,785
11,911
23,186
36,228
10,720
10,434

Lapsed

Market price 
on award 
p
— 1,168.2
— 1,429.4
839.6
839.6
839.6
— 1,168.2
— 1,429.4
839.6
839.6
839.6
— 1,168.2
— 1,429.4
839.6
839.6
839.6
839.6
839.6
839.6

3,021
—
3,180

2,455
—
1,285

2,353
—
636
993
—
286

Total value 
on calling1 

Market price 
on calling 
p
£
1,546.7
220,433
370,058
1,546.7
1,546.7 1,703,342
1,546.7
921,094
1,546.7 1,793,003
383,561
1,546.7
1,546.7
333,263
1,546.7 1,384,185
372,270
1,546.7
724,666
1,546.7
148,418
1,531.5
1,531.5
262,499
1,479.5 1,269,146
176,217
1,479.5
343,025
1,479.5
560,331
1,546.7
165,804
1,546.7
161,380
1,546.7

Dividends 
paid on 
vested shares
£
15,281
13,425
170,088
91,976
179,041
26,590
12,090
138,219
37,173
72,362
10,391
9,617
166,328
23,094
44,955
55,952
16,556
16,115

1  These are the actual number of shares and values realised on calling and may not sum due to rounding.

Notes to the details of EDs’ share exercises during the year
The DSA is a mandatory deferral of a portion of the annual bonus.

The DSA, LTIP and SMP consist of the right for EDs to call for shares in the company from the employee benefit trust or 
Treasury Shares, at nil cost, together with a cash amount representing accrued notional dividends thereon. The DSA, LTIP 
and SMP awards may be forfeited if the ED leaves employment in certain circumstances preceding the vesting date. They 
may be called for at any time up to 12 months from the date of vesting. The value of the awards is charged to the group’s 
income statement in the year to which the award relates for the DSA and Invested SMP Shares, and spread over the vesting 
period for the LTIP and Matched SMP Share awards.

The LTIP awards are held under the 2009 LTIP and are subject to the performance criteria described in the remuneration 
policy on page 65. The Matched SMP Shares are subject to the same performance criteria.

Details of EDs’ Option Exercises During the Year (Audited)
No EDs exercised options during the 2016 financial year.

Single Total Figure of Remuneration for Non-executive Directors (Audited)

Name
Oliver Corbett
Geoffrey Howe4
Lesley Jones
Bridget Macaskill5
Strone Macpherson

Fees1 and benefits2 total

2016 
£’000
100
95
103
107
220

20153 
£’000
95
83
96
99
210

1  Non-executive director fees were increased with effect from 1 August 2015.
2  Benefits include taxable travel related expenses in respect of attendance at board meetings. Amounts disclosed have been grossed up using the appropriate  

tax rate. 

3  Prior year fees have been restated to include taxable travel related expenses which are grossed up using the appropriate rate. 
4  Geoffrey Howe was appointed senior independent director on 20 November 2014.
5  Bridget Macaskill was appointed chairman of the Remuneration Committee in November 2014.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements80

Notes to the single total figure of remuneration for non-executive directors
The fees payable to non-executive directors for the 2016 and 2017 financial years are as follows:

Role
Chairman1
Non-executive director 
Supplements 
Senior independent director 
Chairman of Audit Committee 
Chairman of Remuneration Committee 
Chairman of Risk Committee 
Committee membership2

1  The chairman receives no other fees for chairmanship or membership of board committees.
2  No fees are payable to the chairman, or for membership, of the Nomination and Governance Committee.

Non-executive Directors’ Share Interests (Audited)
The interests of the directors in the ordinary shares of the company are set out below:

Name
Oliver Corbett
Geoffrey Howe
Lesley Jones
Bridget Macaskill
Strone Macpherson

2017 
£220,000
£65,000

2016 
£220,000
£65,000

£15,000
£25,000
£25,000
£25,000
£5,000

£15,000
£25,000
£25,000
£25,000
£5,000

Shares held 
beneficially at  
31 July  
2016
—
5,000
—
2,500
13,300

Shares held 
beneficially at  
31 July  
2015
—
5,000
—
2,500
13,300

There were no changes in notifiable interests between 31 July 2016 and 12 September 2016.

Advice
During the year under review and up to the date of this report, the Committee consulted and took advice from the following 
advisers and executives:
•  PwC;
•  Chairman of the board;
•  Chief executive;
•  Group head of human resources;
•  Head of reward and HR operations; 
•  Group chief risk officer; and
•  Company secretary.

Where the Committee seeks advice from employees this never relates to their own remuneration.

PwC also provided consultancy services to the group during the financial year and were originally engaged to advise on 
remuneration in 2008. PwC are a member of, and adhere to, the Remuneration Consultants Group Voluntary Code of 
Conduct. PwC were paid £69,420 in fees for remuneration services related to the 2016 financial year. The Committee has 
satisfied themselves that the advice received from all parties named above was objective and independent.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration continued81

Statement of Implementation of Remuneration Policy 
in the Following Financial Year
Salary
The Committee determines the appropriate level of salary 
with reference to the EDs' role and experience, increases for 
the broader population and external factors. However, due to 
cost discipline measures within the group during the year, the 
Committee determined that it was appropriate not to award 
salary increases to the EDs for the following financial year. 
The average salary increase awarded to employees across 
the group was 2.6%.

Benefits
The EDs will receive benefits in line with those outlined in the 
Remuneration Policy table on page 63. There will be no 
increases to the allowances or benefits, other than any 
potential increase in the cost of providing them.

Annual bonus
The annual bonuses will be subject to the caps and 
determined based on assessment against the performance 
measures outlined in the Remuneration Policy table on page 
64. Because of commercial sensitivity, the details of the 
performance targets and achievement against those will be 
outlined in the 2017 Annual Report on Remuneration.

Performance awards
The LTIP awards will be subject to the caps and determined 
in line with the objectives outlined in the Remuneration Policy 
table. The performance measures will be in line with those 
outlined in the Remuneration Policy table on page 65. 
Because of commercial sensitivity, the details of the 
achievement against performance targets will be outlined in 
the 2017 Annual Report on Remuneration.

Pension
The EDs will continue to receive a cash allowance in lieu of a 
pension equivalent to 22.5% of base salary. 

This report was approved by the board of directors on 
27 September 2016 and signed on its behalf by:

Bridget Macaskill
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements82

Financial Statements

84 

Independent Auditor’s Report to the  
Members of Close Brothers Group plc

87  Consolidated Income Statement
88  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
89  Consolidated Balance Sheet
90  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
91  Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
92  Company Balance Sheet
93  Company Statement of Changes in Equity
94  The Notes
135  Glossary
136  Investor Relations
136  Cautionary Statement

Photographed on location at Cosworth Ltd.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201683

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements84

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of  
Close Brothers Group plc

Opinion on Financial Statements of Close Brothers  
Group plc
In our opinion:
•  The financial statements give a true and fair view of the 

state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as 
at 31 July 2016 and of the group’s profit for the year then 
ended;

•  The group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) as adopted by the 
European Union;

•  The parent company financial statements have been 

properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, including FRS 
102 “The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the 
UK and Republic of Ireland”; and

•  The financial statements have been prepared in 

accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 
2006 and, as regards the group financial statements, 
Article 4 of the International Accounting Standards (“IAS”) 
Regulation.

The financial statements comprise the Consolidated Income 
Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 
Income, the Consolidated Balance Sheet, the Consolidated 
Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated Cash Flow 
Statement, the Company Balance Sheet, the Company 
Statement of Changes in Equity and the related notes 1 to 
31. The financial reporting framework that has been applied 
in the preparation of the group financial statements is 
applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European 
Union. The financial reporting framework that has been 
applied in the preparation of the parent company financial 
statements is applicable law and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice), including FRS 102 “The Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of 
Ireland”.

Going concern and the directors’ assessment of the 
principal risks that would threaten the solvency or liquidity 
of the group
As required by the Listing Rules we have reviewed the 
directors’ statement regarding the appropriateness of the 
going concern basis of accounting contained within note 1(c) 
to the financial statements and the directors’ statement on 
the longer-term viability of the group contained within the 
Directors’ Report. 

Risk
Loan impairment provisions
As detailed in note 2, critical accounting estimates and 
judgements on page 99, loan impairment provisions in the 
Banking division reflect estimates of the amount and timing 
of future recoveries which require an assessment of matters 
such as future economic conditions and the value of 
collateral. Loan impairment provisions of £59.7 million 
represented approximately 1% of loans and advances to 
customers. The income statement charge for the year was 
£37.9 million.

We have nothing material to add or draw attention to in 
relation to:
•  The directors’ confirmation on page 51 that they have 
carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks 
facing the group, including those that would threaten its 
business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity;

•  The disclosures on pages 28 to 31 that describe those 

risks and explain how they are being managed or 
mitigated;

•  The directors’ statement in note 1(c) to the financial 

statements about whether they considered it appropriate 
to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing them and their identification of any material 
uncertainties to the group’s ability to continue to do so 
over a period of at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements;

•  The directors’ explanation on page 46 as to how they have 
assessed the prospects of the group, over what period 
they have done so and why they consider that period to be 
appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a 
reasonable expectation that the group will be able to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due 
over the period of their assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any necessary 
qualifications or assumptions.

We agreed with the directors’ adoption of the going concern 
basis of accounting and we did not identify any such material 
uncertainties. However, because not all future events or 
conditions can be predicted, this statement is not a 
guarantee as to the group’s ability to continue as a going 
concern.

Independence
We are required to comply with the Financial Reporting 
Council’s Ethical Standards for Auditors and we confirm that 
we are independent of the group and we have fulfilled our 
other ethical responsibilities in accordance with those 
standards. We also confirm we have not provided any of the 
prohibited non-audit services referred to in those standards.

Our assessment of risks of material misstatement
The assessed risks of material misstatement described 
below are those that had the greatest effect on our audit 
strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit and directing 
the efforts of the engagement team:

How the scope of our audit responded to the risk
Our procedures included understanding and testing the 
controls in respect of the group’s loan impairment process 
such as the timely recognition of impairment provisions, the 
completeness and accuracy of reports used in the loan 
impairment process and management review processes 
over the calculation of collective and specific provisions. 
We tested the inputs used in collective impairment models 
and considered whether those inputs reflected default and 
recovery experience across each of the Banking division’s 
portfolios appropriately adjusted to reflect current experience 
and economic conditions where relevant.

We audited a sample of specific provisions against 
individually significant impaired loans including challenging 
collateral values and discount rates assumed in the 
provisions and, where relevant, with the assistance of our 
property valuation specialists.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 201685

Risk
Revenue recognition 
Interest income and fee and commission income is detailed 
in note 4 on page 102 and note 2 critical accounting 
estimates and judgements on page 99. The group’s revenue 
recognition policy is detailed in note 1(h), significant 
accounting policies on page 95.
•  Interest income

Interest income on loans and advances made by the 
group is recognised using the effective interest rate 
method and any fees and direct transaction costs that 
form an integral part of the yield are included in the 
effective interest rate. The identification of applicable fees 
and direct costs to be included in the effective interest rate 
can be judgemental. The group’s net interest income was 
£422.6 million.

•  Fee and commission income

This primarily arises in the Banking and Asset 
Management divisions. The group’s fee and commission 
income was £189.2 million.

The timing of recognition of fees can be judgemental as fees 
may be recognised immediately or over a period depending 
on the nature of the service provided and determining 
accrued fees can involve the use of estimates.

Goodwill 
As detailed in note 2, critical accounting estimates and 
judgements on page 99, the directors assess the carrying 
value of goodwill for impairment on an annual basis and 
when there are indicators of impairment. The carrying value 
of goodwill was £85.9 million. 

Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires estimation 
of the recoverable amount of the group’s cash generating 
units (“CGUs”). The recoverable amount is determined using 
forecast future cash flows and growth rates discounted at a 
rate appropriate to the relevant business and hence involve a 
number of assumptions and estimates.

Last year our report included a risk relating to gains less 
losses arising from dealing in securities. This risk has not 
been included this year as the revenue recognition does not 
involve significant management judgement and is dependent 
on control processes where there is a history of few errors 
being identified.

Management’s consideration of these risks is set out in note 
2, critical accounting estimates and judgements, on page 99. 
The Audit Committee’s consideration of these risks is set out 
on page 56.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of 
the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our 
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion 
on these matters.

Our application of materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in 
the financial statements that makes it probable that the 
economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person 
would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in 
planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the 
results of our work.

How the scope of our audit responded to the risk
We audited the effective interest rate models by testing 
controls, challenging the assumptions used to estimate the 
effective interest rates used in determining interest income 
and re-performing a sample of effective interest rate 
calculations. This included involving our computer audit 
specialists to test the extraction of data used in the 
calculations. We audited a sample of lending arrangements 
by agreeing them to loan agreements and cash receipts to 
assess whether the appropriate fees and costs had been 
reflected in the effective interest rate.

We tested controls over revenue recognition in the Banking 
division. We audited a sample of lending fees receivable by 
agreeing them to loan agreements and cash receipts and we 
assessed the accounting treatment and timing of recognition 
of the fee.

We obtained a sample of Asset Management client 
agreements and checked that the fees had been calculated 
in accordance with the agreements and recognised 
appropriately. We tested a sample of accrued fees by 
reference to final assets under management determined 
post year end and challenged related estimates. 

We challenged management’s assumptions used in the 
impairment model for goodwill. This included challenging 
cash flow forecasts by considering the accuracy of past cash 
flow projections. Using our internal valuations specialists to 
independently derive discount rates, we assessed the 
appropriateness of those used by management. We also 
benchmarked discount and growth rates to available external 
peer group data.

We performed sensitivity analysis and considered the impact 
of changes to each of the key assumptions used in 
management’s impairment model.

We determined materiality for the group financial statements 
as a whole to be £11.0 million (2015: £11.0 million) based on 
5% (2015: 5%) of operating profit before tax.

Operating profit before tax was used as the basis for 
determining materiality as we believe this is the key metric 
used by members of the company in assessing financial 
performance.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report all 
audit differences in excess of £220,000 (2015: £200,000), as 
well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, 
warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to 
the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified 
when assessing the overall presentation of the financial 
statements. 

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements86

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of  
Close Brothers Group plc continued

An overview of the scope of our audit
Our group audit scope focused on each of the divisions of 
the group, all of which comprise subsidiaries which are 
subject to full scope audits for the year ended 31 July 2016. 
Our audits of each subsidiary were planned using levels of 
materiality appropriate for each subsidiary on a standalone 
basis, up to a maximum of £9.9 million (2015: £8.3 million). 
Together with the group’s and the Banking central functions, 
which were also subject to a full scope audit, our audit scope 
covered the entire group. 

The group audit team works closely with the divisional and 
subsidiary audit teams throughout the audit and the senior 
statutory auditor met with divisional senior management 
during the year.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies 
Act 2006
In our opinion:
•  The part of the Report of the Board on Directors’ 

Remuneration to be audited has been properly prepared in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and

•  The information given in the Strategic Report and the 
Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the 
financial statements are prepared is consistent with the 
financial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception
Adequacy of explanations received and accounting 
records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to 
you if, in our opinion:
•  We have not received all the information and explanations 

we require for our audit; or

•  Adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 
parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not visited by us; or

•  The parent company financial statements are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to 
report if in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’ 
remuneration have not been made or the part of the Report 
of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration to be audited is not 
in agreement with the accounting records and returns. We 
have nothing to report arising from these matters.

Corporate Governance Statement
Under the Listing Rules we are also required to review the 
part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the 
company’s compliance with 10 provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code. We have nothing to report 
arising from our review.

Our duty to read other information in the Annual Report
Under International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland), 
we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, information 
in the Annual Report is:
•  Materially inconsistent with the information in the audited 

financial statements; or

•  Apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially 

inconsistent with, our knowledge of the group acquired in 
the course of performing our audit; or

In particular, we are required to consider whether we have 
identified any inconsistencies between our knowledge 
acquired during the audit and the directors’ statement that 
they consider the Annual Report is fair, balanced and 
understandable and whether the Annual Report 
appropriately discloses those matters that we communicated 
to the Audit Committee which we consider should have been 
disclosed. We confirm that we have not identified any such 
inconsistencies or misleading statements.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities, the directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied 
that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to 
audit and express an opinion on the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and International Standards 
on Auditing (UK and Ireland). We also comply with 
International Standard on Quality Control 1 (UK and Ireland). 
Our audit methodology and tools aim to ensure that our 
quality control procedures are effective, understood and 
applied. Our quality controls and systems include our 
dedicated professional standards review team and 
independent partner reviews.

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a 
body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken 
so that we might state to the company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility 
to anyone other than the company and the company’s 
members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for 
the opinions we have formed.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and 
disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give 
reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free 
from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or 
error. This includes an assessment of: whether the 
accounting policies are appropriate to the group and the 
parent company’s circumstances and have been 
consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the 
reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by 
the directors; and the overall presentation of the financial 
statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-
financial information in the Annual Report to identify material 
inconsistencies with the audited financial statements and to 
identify any information that is apparently materially incorrect 
based on, or materially inconsistent with, the knowledge 
acquired by us in the course of performing the audit. If we 
become aware of any apparent material misstatements or 
inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Robert Topley (Senior statutory auditor)
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor
London, United Kingdom

27 September 2016

•  Otherwise misleading.
An audit does not provide assurance on the maintenance and integrity of the website, including controls used to achieve this, and in particular on whether any changes 
may have occurred to the financial statements since first published. These matters are the responsibility of the directors but no control procedures can provide absolute 
assurance in this area. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements differs from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Consolidated Income Statement
for the year ended 31 July 2016

Interest income
Interest expense

Net interest income

Fee and commission income
Fee and commission expense
Gains less losses arising from dealing in securities
Other income
Depreciation of operating lease assets

Non-interest income

Operating income

Administrative expenses
Impairment losses on loans and advances
Total operating expenses before amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition
Operating profit before amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition

Operating profit before tax
Tax

Profit after tax from continuing operations
Profit from discontinued operations, net of tax
Profit after tax
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests from continuing operations

Profit attributable to shareholders

From continuing operations
Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share

From continuing and discontinued operations
Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share

Interim dividend per share paid
Final dividend per share

1 

 Re-presented – see note 1(d).

87

Note
4
4

4
4

4
11

15

6

7

8
8

8
8

9
9

2016 
£ million
550.1
(127.5)

20151
£ million
528.8
(132.3)

422.6

396.5

189.2
(28.5)
67.9
55.8
(19.6)

195.7
(30.2)
72.0
55.5
(16.7)

264.8

276.3

687.4

672.8

(415.9)
(37.9)
(453.8)
233.6
(5.1)

228.5
(42.2)

186.3
–
186.3
(0.2)

(406.0)
(41.9)
(447.9)
224.9
(5.0)

219.9
(45.4)

174.5
11.2
185.7
 – 

186.5

185.7

125.7p
124.3p

117.8p
116.5p

125.7p
124.3p

125.4p
124.0p

19.0p
38.0p

18.0p
35.5p

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements88

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
for the year ended 31 July 2016

Profit after tax

Other comprehensive income/(expense) that may be reclassified to income statement  

from continuing operations
Currency translation gains/(losses)
Losses on cash flow hedging
Gains/(losses) on equity shares classified as available for sale
Available for sale investment gains transferred to income statement on disposal
Tax relating to items that may be reclassified

Other comprehensive (expense)/income that will not be reclassified to income statement 

from continuing operations

Defined benefit pension scheme losses
Tax relating to items that will not be reclassified

Other comprehensive expense, net of tax from continuing operations
Other comprehensive expense, net of tax from discontinued operations

Total comprehensive income

Attributable to
Non-controlling interests
Shareholders

2016 
£ million
186.3

2015
£ million
185.7

3.2
(6.1)
0.2
(4.2)
0.9

(3.0)
(5.5)
(0.5)
(6.8)
2.5

(6.0)

(13.3)

(1.9)
0.3

(1.6)

(7.6)
–

(2.0)
0.4

(1.6)

(14.9)
(1.2)

178.7

169.6

(0.2)
178.9

–
169.6

178.7

169.6

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Consolidated Balance Sheet
at 31 July 2016

Assets
Cash and balances at central banks
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Debt securities
Equity shares
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced
Derivative financial instruments
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax assets
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

Total assets

Liabilities
Settlement balances and short positions
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue
Loans from money brokers against stock advanced
Derivative financial instruments
Current tax liabilities
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities
Subordinated loan capital

Total liabilities

Equity
Called up share capital
Share premium account
Retained earnings
Other reserves

Total shareholders’ equity

Non-controlling interests

Total equity

Total liabilities and equity

89

Note

2016 
£ million

2015 
£ million

10
11
12
13

14
15
16
6
17

18
19
19
19
19

14

17
20

21

847.4
478.1
121.5
6,431.6
221.3
28.2
52.4
44.7
147.9
185.8
55.2
134.1

1,038.0
398.3
84.6
5,737.8
149.5
41.2
38.4
19.7
144.2
148.4
39.4
117.8

8,748.2

7,957.3

475.6
71.1
4,894.6
469.1
1,422.8
30.0
16.3
20.0
205.4
46.4

404.3
35.1
4,481.4
381.2
1,365.0
–
7.1
17.9
209.0
46.4

7,651.3

6,947.4

37.7
284.0
797.5
(22.1)

37.7
284.0
694.4
(6.3)

1,097.1

1,009.8

(0.2)

0.1

1,096.9

1,009.9

8,748.2

7,957.3

Approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 27 September 2016 and signed on its behalf by:

P.S.S. Macpherson 
Chairman 

P. Prebensen
Chief Executive

Registered number: 520241

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements90

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 July 2016

Called up 
share capital 
£ million
37.7

Share 
premium 
account 
£ million
283.8

–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–

–
0.1
–
–
0.1
–
–
–

At 1 August 2014

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive 
(expense)/income
Total comprehensive 
income/(expense) 
for the year

Exercise of options
Dividends paid
Shares purchased
Shares issued
Shares released
Other movements
Income tax

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive 
(expense)/income
Total comprehensive 
income/(expense) 
for the year

Exercise of options
Dividends paid
Shares purchased
Shares issued
Shares released
Other movements
Income tax

–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Available 
for sale 
movements 
reserve 
£ million
9.6

–

Retained 
earnings 
£ million
589.8

185.7

(1.6)

(6.3)

184.1
–
(74.3)
–
–
–
(8.3)
3.1

186.5

(6.3)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

3.3

–

(1.6)

(3.3)

184.9
–
(80.3)
–
–
–
(2.5)
1.0

(3.3)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

At 31 July 2015

37.7

284.0

694.4

–

–

–
–
–
(18.2)
–
20.5
0.7
–

(4.5)

–

–

–
–
–
(24.4)
–
12.8
1.8
–

Other reserves

Share- 
based 
payments 
reserve 
£ million
(7.5)

Exchange 
movements 
reserve 
£ million
1.0

Cash flow 
hedging 
reserve 
£ million
2.1

Total 
attributable 
to equity 
holders 
£ million
916.5

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
£ million
1.1

–

–

185.7

(3.8)

(4.4)

(16.1)

Total 
equity 
£ million
917.6

185.7

(16.1)

169.6
0.1
(74.4)
(18.2)
0.1
20.5
(8.5)
3.1

–

–

–
–
(0.1)
–
–
–
(0.9)
–

(4.4)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

169.6
0.1
(74.3)
(18.2)
0.1
20.5
(7.6)
3.1

(2.3) 1,009.8

0.1 1,009.9

–

186.5

(0.2)

186.3

(4.4)

(7.6)

–

(7.6)

(4.4)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

178.9
–
(80.3)
(24.4)
–
12.8
(0.7)
1.0

(0.2)
–
–
–
–
–
(0.1)
–

178.7
–
(80.3)
(24.4)
–
12.8
(0.8)
1.0

(3.8)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

(2.8)

–

1.7

1.7
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

At 31 July 2016

37.7

284.0

797.5

–

(14.3)

(1.1)

(6.7) 1,097.1

(0.2) 1,096.9

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
for the year ended 31 July 2016

Net cash outflow from operating activities

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from investing activities
Purchase of:
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets – software
Subsidiaries and non-controlling interest
Sale of:
Property, plant and equipment
Equity shares held for investment
Subsidiary

Net cash outflow before financing activities

Financing activities
Issue of ordinary share capital, net of transaction costs
Purchase of own shares for employee share award schemes
Equity dividends paid
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests
Interest paid on subordinated loan capital and debt financing

Net decrease in cash
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

91

Note
27(a)

2016 
£ million
(18.8)

2015
£ million
(18.0)

27(b)

27(c)

27(d)

(13.6)
(21.7)
(3.6)

0.1
7.6
2.3

(14.8)
(19.1)
(1.0)

0.1
5.6
23.2

(28.9)

(6.0)

(47.7)

(24.0)

–
(24.4)
(80.3)
–
(28.0)

0.1
(18.2)
(74.2)
(0.1)
(18.6)

(180.4)
1,103.7

(135.0)
1,238.7

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

27(e)

923.3

1,103.7

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements92

Company Balance Sheet
at 31 July 2016

Fixed assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investments in subsidiaries

Current assets
Cash at bank
Amounts owed by subsidiaries
Other investments
Corporation tax receivable
Deferred tax assets
Other debtors

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year
Debt securities in issue
Accruals
Provisions
Other creditors

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities
Creditors: Amounts falling due after more than one year:
Debt securities in issue

Net assets

Capital and reserves
Share capital
Share premium account
Profit and loss account
Other reserves

Shareholders’ funds

Note

15
16
31

6

19

17

2016 
£ million

2015 
£ million

–
–
287.0

0.1
0.5
287.0

287.0

287.6

0.2
559.8
1.7
6.3
3.5
2.6

0.3
551.4
2.2
5.1
3.3
5.0

574.1

567.3

205.9
8.3
7.0
1.0

–
8.4
9.7
1.1

222.2

19.2

351.9

548.1

638.9

835.7

19

–

205.6

638.9

630.1

21

37.7
284.0
331.4
(14.2)

37.7
284.0
309.8
(1.4)

638.9

630.1

Approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 27 September 2016 and signed on its behalf by:

P.S.S. Macpherson 
Chairman 

P. Prebensen
Chief Executive

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Company Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 July 2016

93

Other reserves

 Share 
capital 
£ million
37.7

Share 
premium 
account 
£ million
283.8

Profit  
and loss 
account 
£ million
313.3

Available 
for sale 
movements 
reserve 
£ million
0.4

Share- 
based 
payments 
reserve 
£ million
(7.5)

Exchange 
movements 
reserve 
£ million
–

Shareholders’ 
funds 
£ million
627.7

At 1 August 2014

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive (expense)/income
Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year
Exercise of options
Dividends paid
Shares purchased
Shares issued
Shares released
Other movements

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
0.1
–
–
 0.1
–
–

79.9
(1.6)
78.3
–
(74.3)
–
–
–
(7.5)

At 31 July 2015

37.7

284.0

309.8

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive expense
Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year
Exercise of options
Dividends paid
Shares purchased
Shares issued
Shares released
Other movements

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

106.2
(1.6)
104.6
–
(80.3)
–
–
–
(2.7)

At 31 July 2016

37.7

284.0

331.4

–
(0.4)
(0.4)
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
(18.2)
–
20.5
0.7

(4.5)

–
–
–
–
–
(24.4)
–
12.8
1.8

–
3.1
3.1
–
–
–
–
–
–

3.1

–
(3.0)
(3.0)
–
–
–
–
–
–

79.9
1.1
81.0
0.1
(74.3)
(18.2)
0.1
20.5
(6.8)

630.1

106.2
(4.6)
101.6
–
(80.3)
(24.4)
–
12.8
(0.9)

(14.3)

0.1

638.9

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements94

The Notes

1. Significant accounting policies
(a) Reporting entity
Close Brothers Group plc (“the company”), a public limited 
company incorporated and domiciled in the UK, together 
with its subsidiaries (collectively, “the group”), operates 
through three divisions: Banking, Securities and Asset 
Management, and is primarily located within the UK.

The company financial statements (“the company accounts”) 
have been prepared in compliance with United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 
102 ‘‘The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the 
United Kingdom and the Republic of Ireland’’ (‘‘FRS 102’’) and 
the Companies Act 2006, under the provision of the Large 
and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and 
Reports) Regulations 2008 (SI 2008/410). This is the first year 
the company has presented its results under FRS 102. The 
date of transition to FRS 102 was 1 August 2014. Details of the 
transition to FRS 102 are disclosed in note 29. The company 
has taken advantage of the exemption in Section 408 of the 
Companies Act 2006 not to present its company income 
statement and related notes.

(b) Compliance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards
The consolidated financial statements (“the consolidated 
accounts”) have been prepared and approved by the 
directors in accordance with all relevant IFRSs as issued by 
the International Accounting Standards Board, and 
interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee, 
endorsed by the EU.

Standards adopted during the year
There were no new standards adopted during the year 
ended 31 July 2016. The accounting policies adopted are 
consistent with those of the previous financial year.

Hedge accounting
IFRS 9 contains revised requirements which aim to simplify 
hedge accounting. The standard does not address macro 
hedge accounting strategies, which are being considered in a 
separate project. Until such time as that project is complete, 
IFRS 9 includes an accounting policy choice to remain with 
IAS 39 hedge accounting. The group expects to exercise the 
accounting policy choice to continue IAS 39 hedge accounting.

IFRS 15 “Revenue from contracts with customers”
Effective for the group from 1 August 2018, this standard 
replaces IAS 18 and IAS 11 and does not apply to financial 
instruments, lease contracts or insurance contracts which fall 
under the scope of other IFRSs. The standard introduces a 
new revenue recognition model which features a contract-
based five-step analysis of transactions to determine whether, 
how much, and when revenue is recognised. The standard is 
not anticipated to have a material impact on the group.

IFRS 16 “Leases”
Effective for the group from 1 August 2019, the standard 
replaces IAS 17 and introduces a new recognition model that 
recognises all leases on a lessee’s balance sheet (subject to 
certain exemptions). Lessor accounting is largely unchanged. 
The standard is not anticipated to have a material impact on 
the group.

(c) Basis of preparation
The consolidated and company accounts have been 
prepared under the historical cost convention, except for the 
revaluation of financial assets and liabilities held at fair value 
through profit or loss, available for sale financial assets and 
all derivative financial instruments (“derivatives”).

The financial statements are prepared on a going concern 
basis as disclosed in the Report of the Directors.

Standards issued with effective dates, subject to EU 
endorsement, which do not impact on these financial 
statements.
IFRS 9 “Financial instruments”
IFRS 9 will replace IAS 39 and is effective for the group on 
1 August 2018. IFRS 9, in particular the impairment 
requirements, will lead to significant changes in the 
accounting for financial instruments and work is ongoing 
within the group to quantify the financial impact.

(d) Re-presentation of consolidated income statement
As announced on 13 September 2016, following a review of 
our financial reporting, we have implemented minor changes 
to the calculation of key metrics in the Banking division to 
better represent the contribution of operating lease assets 
and the role of Treasury. This has resulted in depreciation of 
operating lease assets, previously included in administrative 
expenses, to be reported as a cost of sales and included in 
operating income in the consolidated income statement.

Impairment 
IFRS 9 introduces a revised three-stage impairment model 
which will recognise expected credit losses based on 
unbiased forward-looking information, replacing the existing 
incurred loss models. The standard requires the recognition 
of lifetime expected credit losses when the credit risk of a 
financial instrument has increased significantly since initial 
recognition. Where a significant increase in credit risk has not 
occurred, 12 month expected credit losses are recognised.  

Classification and measurement
IFRS 9 will require financial assets to be classified on the basis 
of the business model for managing financial assets and the 
objectives of the contractual cash flow characteristics of the 
instruments. This assessment determines how the financial 
asset should then be measured. 

To enable comparisons and in line with the treatment 
adopted for the 2016 consolidated income statement, the 
2015 comparative information has also been re-presented. 
This has resulted in non-interest income and operating 
income to decrease by £16.7 million with a corresponding 
decrease in administrative expenses and total operating 
expenses before amortisation of intangible assets on 
acquisition. 

There has been no impact on profit attributable to 
shareholders or equity.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued95

(e) Consolidation
Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are all entities over which the group has control. 
The group controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has 
rights to variable returns from its involvement with the entity 
and has the ability to affect those returns through its power 
over the entity. Such power generally accompanies a 
shareholding of more than one half of the voting rights. 
Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which the 
group effectively obtains control. They are de-consolidated 
from the date that control ceases.

The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for 
the acquisition of subsidiaries. Under the acquisition method 
of accounting, with some limited exceptions, the assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities of a subsidiary are measured 
at their fair values at the date of acquisition. Any non-
controlling interest is measured either at fair value or at the 
non-controlling interest’s proportion of the net assets acquired. 
Acquisition related costs are accounted for as expenses when 
incurred, unless directly related to the issue of debt or equity 
securities. Any excess of the cost of acquisition over net 
assets is capitalised as goodwill. All intra group balances, 
transactions, income and expenses are eliminated.

(f) Discontinued operations
The results of discontinued operations are shown as a single 
amount on the face of the consolidated income statement 
comprising the post-tax profit or loss of discontinued 
operations and the post-tax gain or loss recognised either on 
measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on the disposal 
of the discontinued operation. A discontinued operation is a 
CGU or a group of CGUs that either has been disposed of, or 
is classified as held for sale, and represents a separate major 
line of business or geographical area of operations, is part of a 
single coordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of 
business or geographical area of operations or is a subsidiary 
acquired exclusively with a view to resale.

(g) Foreign currency translation
For the company and those subsidiaries whose balance 
sheets are denominated in sterling, which is the company’s 
functional and presentation currency, monetary assets and 
liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated 
into sterling at the closing rates of exchange at the balance 
sheet date. Foreign currency transactions are translated into 
sterling at the average rates of exchange over the year and 
exchange differences arising are taken to the consolidated 
income statement.

The balance sheets of subsidiaries denominated in foreign 
currencies are translated into sterling at the closing rates. 
The income statements for these subsidiaries are translated 
at the average rates and exchange differences arising are 
taken to equity. Such exchange differences are reclassified 
to the consolidated income statement in the period in which 
the subsidiary is disposed of.

(h) Revenue recognition
Interest income
Interest on loans and advances made by the group, and fee
income and expense and other direct costs relating to loan 
origination, restructuring or commitments are recognised in 
the consolidated income statement using the effective 
interest rate method.

The effective interest rate method applies a rate that 
discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts 
relating to a financial instrument to its net carrying amount. 
The cash flows take into account all contractual terms of the 
financial instrument including transaction costs and all other 
premiums or discounts but not future credit losses.

Fees and commissions
Where fees that have not been included within the effective 
interest rate method are earned on the execution of a 
significant act, such as fees arising from negotiating or 
arranging a transaction for a third party, they are recognised 
as revenue when that act has been completed. Fees and 
corresponding expenses in respect of other services are 
recognised in the consolidated income statement as the right 
to consideration or payment accrues through performance 
of services. In particular, upfront commissions paid in 
respect of managing, as opposed to originating, fund 
products are initially included within “accruals and deferred 
income” and then recognised as revenue as the services are 
provided. To the extent that fees and commissions are 
recognised in advance of billing they are included as accrued 
income or expense.

Dividends
Dividend income is recognised when the right to receive 
payment is established.

Gains less losses arising from dealing in securities
Net gains arising from both buying and selling securities and 
from positions held in securities, including related interest 
income and dividends.

(i) Exceptional items
Items of income and expense that are material by size and/or 
nature and are non-recurring are classified as exceptional 
items on the face of the consolidated income statement. The 
separate reporting of these items helps give an indication of 
the group’s underlying performance.

(j) Financial assets and liabilities (excluding derivatives)
Classification
The group classifies its financial assets into the following 
measurement categories: (i) financial assets held at fair value 
through profit or loss; (ii) loans and receivables; and (iii) 
available for sale. Financial liabilities are classified as either 
held at fair value through profit or loss, or at amortised cost 
using the effective interest method.

Management determines the classification of its financial 
assets and liabilities at initial recognition.

Financial assets and liabilities held at fair value through 
profit or loss
This category has two sub-categories: Financial assets and 
liabilities held for trading, and those designated at fair value 
through profit or loss at inception. 

A financial asset or liability is classified as trading if acquired 
principally for the purpose of selling in the short term, which 
for the group relates to Winterflood, or are derivatives (not in 
qualifying hedge relationships).

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements96

1. Significant accounting policies continued
Financial assets and liabilities may be designated at fair value 
through profit or loss when:
•  The designation eliminates or significantly reduces a 

measurement or recognition inconsistency that would 
otherwise arise from measuring assets or liabilities on a 
different basis;

•  A group of financial assets and/or liabilities is managed 
and its performance evaluated on a fair value basis; or
•  The assets or liabilities include embedded derivatives and 
such derivatives are required to be recognised separately.

Financial assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit 
or loss are subsequently carried at fair value, with gains and 
losses arising from changes in fair value taken directly to the 
consolidated income statement.

Loans and receivables
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets 
with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in 
an active market and it is expected that substantially all of the 
initial investment will be recovered, other than because of 
credit deterioration. Loans and receivables are subsequently 
carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method 
and recorded net of provisions for impairment losses.

Available for sale
Available for sale assets are those non-derivative financial 
assets intended to be held for an indefinite period of time, 
which may be sold in response to liquidity requirements or 
changes in interest rates, exchange rates or equity prices. 
Available for sale financial assets are subsequently carried at 
fair value, with gains and losses arising from changes in fair 
value taken to a separate component of equity until the asset 
is sold, or is impaired, when the cumulative gain or loss is 
transferred to the consolidated income statement. 

The fair values of quoted financial assets or financial liabilities 
in active markets are based on current prices. If the market 
for a financial asset or financial liability is not active, or they 
relate to unlisted securities, the group establishes fair value 
by using valuation techniques. These include the use of 
recent arm’s length transactions, discounted cash flow 
analysis, and other valuation techniques commonly used by 
market participants.

Derecognition
Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive 
cash flows from the financial assets have expired or where 
the group has transferred substantially all risks and rewards 
of ownership. If substantially all the risks and rewards have 
been neither retained nor transferred and the group has 
retained control, the assets continue to be recognised to the 
extent of the group’s continuing involvement. Financial 
liabilities are derecognised when they are extinguished.

(k) Impairment of financial assets
The group assesses at each balance sheet date whether 
there is any objective evidence that a financial asset or group 
of financial assets classified as available for sale or loans and 
receivables is impaired. A financial asset or group of financial 
assets is impaired and an impairment loss incurred if there is 
objective evidence that an event or events since initial 
recognition of the asset have adversely affected the amount 
or timing of future cash flows from the asset.

Financial assets at amortised cost
If there is objective evidence that an impairment loss on a 
financial asset or group of financial assets classified as loans 
and receivables has been incurred, the group measures the 
amount of the loss as the difference between the carrying 
amount of the asset or group of assets and the present value 
of estimated future cash flows from the asset or group of 
assets discounted at the effective interest rate of the 
instrument at initial recognition. Impairment losses are 
assessed individually for financial assets that are individually 
significant and individually or collectively for assets that are not 
individually significant. In making collective assessment of 
impairment, financial assets are grouped into portfolios on the 
basis of similar risk characteristics.

For loans and receivables, the amount of the loss is measured 
as the difference between the loan’s carrying amount and the 
present value of estimated future cash flows, excluding future 
credit losses that have not been incurred, discounted at the 
original effective interest rate. As the loan amortises over its life, 
the impairment loss may amortise. All impairment losses are 
reviewed at least at each reporting date. If subsequently the 
amount of the loss decreases as a result of a new event, the 
relevant element of the outstanding impairment loss is 
reversed. Interest on impaired financial assets is recognised at 
the original effective interest rate applied to the carrying 
amount as reduced by an allowance for impairment.

For loans that are not considered individually significant, the 
group adopts a formulaic approach which allocates a loss 
rate dependent on the overdue period. Loss rates are based 
on the discounted expected future cash flows and are 
regularly benchmarked against actual outcomes to ensure 
they remain appropriate.

Financial assets carried at fair value
When a decline in the fair value of a financial asset classified 
as available for sale has been recognised directly in equity 
and there is objective evidence that the asset is impaired, the 
cumulative loss is removed from equity and recognised in 
the consolidated income statement. The loss is measured as 
the difference between the amortised cost of the financial 
asset and its current fair value. Impairment losses on 
available for sale equity instruments are not reversed through 
the consolidated income statement, but those on available 
for sale debt instruments are reversed, if there is an increase 
in fair value that is objectively related to a subsequent event.

(l) Settlement accounts
Settlement balance debtors and creditors are the amounts 
due to and from counterparties in respect of the group’s 
market-making activities, and are carried at amortised cost. 
The balances are short term in nature, do not earn interest 
and are recorded at the amount receivable or payable.

(m) Loans to and from money brokers against stock 
advanced
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced is the cash 
collateral provided to these institutions for stock borrowing 
by the group’s market-making activities, and is carried at 
amortised cost. Interest is paid on the stock borrowed and 
earned on the cash deposits advanced. The stock borrowing 
to which the cash deposits relate is short term in nature and 
is recorded at the amount receivable. Loans from money 
brokers against stock collateral provided is recorded at the 
amount payable. Interest is paid on the loans payable.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued97

(n) Finance leases, operating leases and hire purchase 
contracts
A finance lease is a lease or hire purchase contract that 
transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to 
ownership of an asset to the lessee. Finance leases are 
recognised as loans at an amount equal to the gross 
investment in the lease discounted at its implicit interest rate. 
Finance charges on finance leases are taken to income in 
proportion to the net funds invested.

Rental costs under operating leases and hire purchase 
contracts are charged to the consolidated income statement 
in equal instalments over the period of the leases. Rental 
income from operating leases is recognised in equal 
instalments over the period of the leases and included in 
other income in the consolidated income statement.

(o) Sale and repurchase agreements and other secured 
lending and borrowings
Securities may be sold subject to a commitment to 
repurchase them. Such securities are retained on the 
consolidated balance sheet when substantially all the risks 
and rewards of ownership remain with the group. The 
transactions are treated as collateralised borrowing and the 
counterparty liability is included within loans and overdrafts 
from banks. Similar secured borrowing transactions including 
securities lending transactions and collateralised short-term 
notes are treated and presented in the same way. These 
secured financing transactions are initially recognised at fair 
value, and subsequently valued at amortised cost, using the 
effective interest rate method.

(p) Securitisation transactions
Where the group securitises its own financial assets, this is 
achieved via the sale of these assets to special purpose 
entities, which in turn issues securities to investors. All financial 
assets continue to be held on the group’s consolidated 
balance sheet together with debt securities in issue 
recognised for the funding – see derecognition policy (j).

(q) Offsetting financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net 
amount presented on the consolidated balance sheet if, and 
only if, there is a legally enforceable right to set off the 
recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a 
net basis, or to realise an asset and settle the liability 
simultaneously.

(r) Derivatives and hedge accounting
In general, derivatives are used to minimise the impact of 
interest, currency rate and equity price changes to the 
group’s financial instruments. They are carried on the 
consolidated balance sheet at fair value which is obtained 
from quoted market prices in active markets, including recent 
market transactions and discounted cash flow models.

continues to qualify for hedge accounting, the amount of the 
ineffectiveness, taking into account the timing of the 
expected cash flows where relevant, would be recorded in 
the consolidated income statement. If the hedge is not, or 
has ceased to be, highly effective the group discontinues 
hedge accounting.

For fair value hedges, changes in the fair value are 
recognised in the consolidated income statement, together 
with changes in the fair value of the hedged item. For cash 
flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the 
effective proportion of the cash flow hedge is recognised 
initially directly in equity and recycled to the consolidated 
income statement in the period when the hedged item 
affects income.

(s) Intangible assets
Computer software (acquired and costs associated with 
development) and intangible assets on acquisition (excluding 
goodwill) are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation 
and provisions for impairment. Amortisation is calculated to 
write off their cost on a straight-line basis over the estimated 
useful lives as follows:

Computer software 
Intangible assets on acquisition 

3 to 5 years
8 to 20 years

Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in 
intangible assets. Goodwill is assessed annually for 
impairment and carried at cost less any accumulated 
impairment.

(t) Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less 
accumulated depreciation and provisions for impairment. 
Depreciation is calculated to write off their cost on a straight-
line basis over their estimated useful lives as follows:

Long leasehold property 
Short leasehold property 
Fixtures, fittings and equipment 
Assets held under operating leases 
Motor vehicles 

40 years
Over the length of the lease
3 to 5 years
1 to 15 years
5 years

(u) Share capital
Share issue costs
Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new 
shares or options including those issued on the acquisition of 
a business are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, 
from the proceeds.

Dividends on ordinary shares
Dividends on ordinary shares are recognised in equity in the 
period in which they are paid or, if earlier, approved by 
shareholders.

On acquisition, certain derivatives are designated as a hedge 
and the group formally documents the relationship between 
these derivatives and the hedged item. The group also 
documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and on 
an ongoing basis, of whether the derivative is highly effective 
in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged 
items. If a hedge was deemed partially ineffective but 

Treasury shares
Where the company or any member of the group purchases 
the company’s share capital, the consideration paid is 
deducted from shareholders’ equity as treasury shares until 
they are cancelled. Where such shares are subsequently 
sold or reissued, any consideration received is included in 
shareholders’ equity.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements98

1. Significant accounting policies continued
(v) Employee benefits
The group operates defined contribution pension schemes 
for eligible employees as well as a defined benefit pension 
scheme which is closed to new members and further 
accrual.

Under the defined contribution scheme the group pays fixed 
contributions into a fund separate from the group’s assets. 
Contributions are charged in the consolidated income 
statement when they become payable.

The expected cost of providing pensions within the funded 
defined benefit scheme, determined on the basis of annual 
valuations using the projected unit method, is charged to the 
consolidated income statement. Actuarial gains and losses 
are recognised in full in the period in which they occur and 
recognised in other comprehensive income.

The retirement benefit obligation recognised in the balance 
sheet represents the present value of the defined benefit 
obligation, as adjusted for unrecognised past service cost, 
and as reduced by the fair value of scheme assets at the 
balance sheet date. Both the return on investment expected 
in the period and the expected financing cost of the liability, 
as estimated at the beginning of the period, are recognised 
in the results for the period. Any variances against these 
estimates in the year form part of the actuarial gain or loss.

The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of 
the group in an independently managed fund.

(w) Share-based payments to employees
At 31 July 2016, the group operates four share-based award 
schemes, an annual bonus plan and three long-term 
incentive schemes (“Incentive Schemes”); the Share 
Matching Plan (“SMP”), the 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan 
(“LTIP”), and the Inland Revenue approved Save As You Earn 
scheme.

The costs of the awards granted under the annual bonus 
plan are based on the salary of the individual at the time the 
award is made. The value of the share award at the grant 
date is charged to the group’s consolidated income 
statement in the year to which the award relates.

The cost of the Incentive Schemes is based on the fair value 
of awards on the date of grant. Fair values for market based 
performance conditions are determined using a stochastic 
(Monte Carlo simulation) pricing model for the SMP and LTIP 
and the Black-Scholes pricing model for the other schemes. 
Both models take into account the exercise price of the 
option, the current share price, the risk free interest rate, the 
expected volatility of the company’s share price over the life 
of the option award and other relevant factors. For non-
market based performance conditions, vesting conditions 
are not taken into account when measuring fair value, but are 
reflected by adjusting the number of shares in each award 
such that the amount recognised reflects the number that 

are expected to, and then actually do, vest. The fair value is 
expensed in the consolidated income statement on a 
straight-line basis over the vesting period, with a 
corresponding credit to the share-based payments reserve. 
At the end of the vesting period, or upon exercise, lapse or 
forfeit if earlier, this credit is transferred to retained earnings. 
Further information on the group’s schemes is provided in 
note 26 and in the Report of the Board on Directors’ 
Remuneration.

(x) Provisions and contingent liabilities
Provisions are recognised in respect of present obligations 
arising from past events where it is probable that outflows of 
resources will be required to settle the obligations and they 
can be reliably estimated.

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose 
existence depends on the outcome of uncertain future 
events or those present obligations where the outflows of 
resources are uncertain or cannot be measured reliably. 
Contingent liabilities are not recognised in the financial 
statements but are disclosed unless they are deemed 
remote.

(y) Taxes, including deferred taxes
Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable profit 
for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported 
in the consolidated income statement because it excludes 
items of income and expense that are taxable or deductible 
in other years and items that are never taxable or deductible. 
The group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax 
rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the 
balance sheet date.

To enable the tax charge to be based on the profit for the 
year, deferred tax is provided in full on temporary timing 
differences, at the rates of tax expected to apply when these 
differences crystallise. Deferred tax assets are recognised 
only to the extent that it is probable that sufficient taxable 
profits will be available against which temporary differences 
can be set. All deferred tax liabilities are offset against 
deferred tax assets in accordance with the provisions of 
IAS 12 “Income taxes”.

(z) Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash 
equivalents comprises cash and demand deposits with 
banks together with short-term highly liquid investments that 
are readily convertible to known amounts of cash.

(aa) Segment reporting
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent 
with the internal reporting provided to the Executive 
Committee, which is considered the group’s chief operating 
decision maker. All transactions between business segments 
are conducted on an arm’s length basis, with intra-segment 
revenue and costs being eliminated on consolidation. 
Income and expenses directly associated with each segment 
are included in determining business segment performance.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued 
99

(b) Revenue
Interest income
The effective interest rate method applies a rate that 
discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts 
relating to a financial instrument to its net carrying amount. 
The estimated future cash flows take into account all 
contractual terms of the financial instrument including 
transaction costs and all other premiums or discounts but 
not future credit losses. Models are reviewed at least 
annually to assess expected lives of groups of assets based 
upon actual repayment profiles.

Fee and commission income
Fee and commission income is recognised depending on 
the nature of service provided:
•  Income which forms an integral part of the effective 

interest rate is recognised as an adjustment to the effective 
interest rate and recorded in interest income;

•  Income earned from provision of services is recognised as 

the services are provided; and

•  Income earned on the execution of a significant act is 

recognised when the act is completed.

(c) Goodwill impairment
The directors review goodwill for impairment at least annually 
or when events or changes in economic circumstances 
indicate that impairment may have taken place. The 
recoverable amounts of relevant CGUs are based on value in 
use calculations using management’s best estimate of future 
cash flows and performance, discounted at a rate which the 
directors estimate to be the return appropriate to the 
business.

2. Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The reported results of the group are sensitive to the 
accounting policies, assumptions and estimates that underlie 
the preparation of its financial statements. UK company law 
and IFRS require the directors, in preparing the group’s 
financial statements, to select suitable accounting policies, 
apply them consistently and make judgements and 
estimates that are reasonable and prudent. The group’s 
estimates and assumptions are based on historical 
experience and expectation of future events and are 
reviewed periodically. The actual outcome may be materially 
different from that anticipated. The judgements and 
assumptions involved in the group’s accounting policies that 
are considered by the board to be the most important to the 
portrayal of its financial condition are as follows:

(a) Loan impairment provisions
Allowances for loan impairment represent management’s 
estimate of the losses incurred in the loan portfolios at the 
balance sheet date. Changes to the allowances for loan 
impairment are reported in the consolidated income 
statement as impairment losses on loans and advances. 
Impairment provisions are made if there is objective evidence 
of impairment as a result of one or more subsequent events 
regarding a significant loan or a portfolio of loans.

Individual impairment losses are determined as the 
difference between the carrying value and the present value 
of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the loans’ 
original effective interest rate. Impairment losses determined 
on a portfolio basis are calculated using a formulaic 
approach which allocates a loss rate dependent on the 
overdue period. Loss rates are based on the discounted 
expected future cash flows and are regularly benchmarked 
against actual outcomes to ensure they remain appropriate.

Estimating the amount and timing of future recoveries 
involves significant judgement, and considers the level of 
arrears as well as the assessment of matters such as future 
economic conditions and the value of collateral. All 
impairment losses are reviewed at least annually.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements100

3. Segmental analysis
The Executive Committee, which is considered to be the 
group’s chief operating decision maker, manages the group 
by class of business as determined by the products and 
services offered and presents the segmental analysis on that 
basis. The group’s activities are organised in three primary 
operating divisions: Banking, Securities and Asset 
Management. A description of the activities, including 
products and services offered by these divisions, is given in 
the Strategic Report. The Group segment includes the 
group’s central functions which comprise Group Executive, 
Finance, Marketing, Communications, Investor Relations, 
Legal, Human Resources, Internal Audit, Compliance, 
Corporate Development, Company Secretariat and Risk. 
Group administrative expenses include staff costs, legal and 
professional fees and property costs attributable to the 
central functions which support and assist the development 

of the divisions. Income within Group is typically immaterial 
and will include interest on cash balances at Group. In the 
segmental reporting information which follows, Group 
consists of the central functions described above as well as 
various non-trading head office companies and consolidation 
adjustments, in order that the information presented 
reconciles to the consolidated income statement and 
balance sheet.

Divisions charge market prices for services rendered to other 
parts of the group. Funding charges between Banking 
businesses are determined by the Banking division’s 
Treasury operation taking into account commercial 
demands. Funding arrangements between other segments 
is limited. More than 90% of all the group’s activities, revenue 
and assets are located in the UK.

Summary Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2016
Net interest income/(expense)
Non-interest income

Operating income

Administrative expenses
Depreciation and amortisation
Impairment losses on loans and advances

Banking
£ million

Securities
£ million

Asset
Management 
£ million

Group
£ million

Continuing
operations
£ million

422.2
89.0

(0.6)
82.9

511.2

82.3

(229.7)
(20.6)
(37.9)

(61.7)
(1.6)
–

0.4
91.9

92.3

(75.9)
(2.0)
–

0.6
1.0

1.6

422.6
264.8

687.4

(24.2)
(0.2)
–

(391.5)
(24.4)
(37.9)

Total operating expenses

(288.2)

(63.3)

(77.9)

(24.4)

(453.8)

Adjusted operating profit/(loss)1
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

External operating income/(expense)
Inter segment operating (expense)/income

Segment operating income

223.0
(0.5)

222.5

524.6
(13.4)

511.2

19.0
–

19.0

82.3
–

82.3

14.4
(4.6)

(22.8)
–

233.6
(5.1)

9.8

(22.8)

228.5

92.9
(0.6)

92.3

(12.4)
14.0

687.4
–

1.6

687.4

1  Adjusted operating profit/(loss) is stated before amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition, profit on disposal of discontinued operations and tax.

Balance Sheet Information at 31 July 2016
Total assets
Total liabilities
Equity

Banking
£ million

Securities
£ million

Asset
Management 
£ million

Group
£ million

Total
£ million

7,988.7
7,195.5
793.2

647.5
577.8
69.7

104.8
49.1
55.7

7.2

8,748.2
(171.1) 7,651.3
1,096.9
178.3

Other segmental information for the year ended 31 July 2016
Property, plant, equipment and intangible asset expenditure
Employees (average number)

95.0
2,077

3.4
238

3.0
570

–
61

101.4
2,946

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continuedThe following table provides further detail on operating income:

Banking
Retail Finance
Commercial Finance
Property Finance
Securities
Market-making and related activities
Asset Management
Investment management
Advice and other services
Other income
Group

Operating income from continuing operations

1  Re-presented  – see note 1(d).

101

2016
£ million

20151
£ million

204.6
202.3
104.3

186.3
195.9
99.7

82.3

94.6

57.4
32.1
2.8
1.6

54.1
36.1
5.4
0.7

687.4

672.8

Summary Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 20151
Net interest income/(expense)
Non-interest income

Operating income

Administrative expenses
Depreciation and amortisation
Impairment losses on loans and advances

Banking
£ million

Securities
£ million

Asset
Management 
£ million

Group
£ million

Continuing
operations
£ million

396.5
85.4

(0.9)
95.5

481.9

94.6

(214.6)
(16.7)
(41.9)

(69.0)
(1.0)
–

0.2
95.4

95.6

(76.4)
(1.4)
–

0.7
–

0.7

(26.3)
(0.6)
–

396.5
276.3

672.8

(386.3)
(19.7)
(41.9)

Total operating expenses

(273.2)

(70.0)

(77.8)

(26.9)

(447.9)

Adjusted operating profit/(loss)2
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

External operating income/(expense)
Inter segment operating (expense)/income

Segment operating income

208.7
(0.5)

208.2

511.8
(13.2)

498.6

24.6
–

24.6

94.6
–

94.6

17.8
(4.5)

(26.2)
–

224.9
(5.0)

13.3

(26.2)

219.9

96.5
(0.9)

95.6

(13.4)
14.1

689.5
–

0.7

689.5

1  Re-presented – see note 1(d).
2  Adjusted operating profit/(loss) is stated before amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition, profit on disposal of discontinued operations and tax.

Balance Sheet Information at 31 July 2015
Total assets
Total liabilities
Equity

Banking
£ million

Securities
£ million

Asset
Management 
£ million

Group
£ million

Total
£ million

7,303.1
6,592.0
711.1

538.7
466.8
71.9

101.1
53.5
47.6

14.4

7,957.3
(164.9) 6,947.4
1,009.9
179.3

Other segmental information for the year ended 31 July 2015
Property, plant, equipment and intangible asset expenditure
Employees (average number)

74.7
1,910

3.5
232

2.6
562

0.1
63

80.9
2,767

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements102

4. Operating profit before tax

Interest income
Cash and balances at central banks
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Other interest income

Interest expense
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Borrowings
Other interest expense

Net interest income

Fee and commission income
Banking
Asset Management
Securities

Fee and commission expense

Net fee and commission income

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

4.1
0.5
542.9
2.6

4.9
0.5
521.4
2.0

550.1

528.8

0.4
79.1
37.4
10.6

0.3
83.5
39.3
9.2

127.5

132.3

422.6

396.5

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

85.4
92.4
11.4

83.3
95.7
16.7

189.2

195.7

(28.5)

(30.2)

160.7

165.5

Fee income and expense (other than amounts calculated using the effective interest rate method) on financial instruments  
that are not at fair value through profit or loss were £85.4 million (2015: £83.3 million) and £24.8 million (2015: £23.8 million) 
respectively.

Fee income and expense arising from trust and other fiduciary activities amounted to £92.4 million (2015: £95.7 million) and 
£3.3 million (2015: £6.0 million) respectively.

Administrative expenses
Staff costs:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Share-based awards
Pension costs

Depreciation and amortisation
Other administrative expenses

1 

 Re-presented – see note 1(d).

2016
£ million

20151
£ million

211.8
29.0
6.2
10.1
257.1
24.4
134.4

201.0
30.5
7.8
9.1
248.4
19.7
137.9

415.9

406.0

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued5. Information regarding the auditor

Fees payable
Audit of the company’s annual accounts
Audit of the company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation
Other services pursuant to legislation
Tax services
Other services

The auditor of the group is Deloitte LLP.

6. Taxation

Tax charged/(credited) to the income statement
Current tax:
UK corporation tax
Foreign tax
Adjustments in respect of previous years

Deferred tax:
Deferred tax credit for the current year
Adjustments in respect of previous years

Tax on items not (credited)/charged to the income statement
Current tax relating to:
Share-based transactions tax allowance in excess of expense recognised
Deferred tax relating to:
Cash flow hedging
Defined benefit pension scheme
Financial instruments classified as available for sale
Share-based transactions tax allowance in excess of expense recognised
Currency translation gains/(losses)

Reconciliation to tax expense
UK corporation tax for the year at 20.0% (2015: 20.7%) on operating profit
Gain on sale of subsidiaries and available for sale investment
Effect of different tax rates in other jurisdictions
Disallowable items and other permanent differences
Banking surcharge
Deferred tax impact of (increased)/decreased UK corporation tax rate
Prior year tax provision

103

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

0.3
0.9
0.3
0.2
0.2

1.9

0.2
0.9
0.3
0.2
0.1

1.7

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

56.5
2.5
(1.1)
57.9

(16.5)
0.8

49.1
2.6
(0.2)
51.5

(6.5)
0.4

42.2

45.4

(2.1)

(4.1)

(1.7)
(0.3)
(0.7)
1.1
1.5

(2.2)

45.7
(0.5)
(0.6)
1.5
8.2
(11.8)
(0.3)

(1.1)
(0.4)
(1.0)
1.0
(0.4)

(6.0)

45.5
–
(0.8)
0.3
–
0.2
0.2

42.2

45.4

The standard UK corporation tax rate for the financial year is 20.0% (2015: 20.7%). From 1 January 2016 an additional 8% 
surcharge applies to banking company profits as defined in legislation. 

The effective tax rate is 18.5% (2015: 20.6%) which is below the UK corporation tax rate. This reflects a write up of deferred 
tax assets due to the introduction of the bank corporation tax surcharge, more than offsetting the surcharge payable on 
profits for the period since 1 January 2016.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements 
104

6. Taxation continued
Movements in deferred tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

Capital 
allowances
£ million

Pension 
scheme
£ million

Share-based 
payments 
and deferred 
compensation
£ million

Available for
sale assets
£ million

Cash flow 
hedging
£ million

Intangible 
assets
£ million

Other
£ million

Total
£ million

Group
At 1 August 2014
Credit to the income statement
Credit to other comprehensive income
Charge to equity
Acquisition
At 31 July 2015
Credit to the income statement
(Charge)/credit to other comprehensive 

income

Charge to equity
Acquisition

At 31 July 2016

27.8
4.9
0.4
–
–
33.1
13.3

(1.5)
–
–

(1.0)
–
0.4
–
–
(0.6)
–

0.3
–
–

10.9
0.3
–
(1.0)
–
10.2
1.1

–
(1.1)
–

44.9

(0.3)

10.2

(1.7)
–
1.0
–
–
(0.7)
–

0.7
–
–

–

(0.5)
–
1.1
–
–
0.6
–

1.7
–
–

2.3

(4.2)
0.9
–
–
(0.3)
(3.6)
1.0

–
–
–

0.4
–
–
–
–
0.4
0.3

–
–
–

31.7
6.1
2.9
(1.0)
(0.3)
39.4
15.7

1.2
(1.1)
–

(2.6)

0.7

55.2

Company
At 1 August 2014
Charge to the income statement
Credit to statement of recognised gains and losses
At 31 July 2015
Charge to the income statement
Credit to statement of recognised gains and losses

At 31 July 2016

Capital 
allowances
£ million

Pension 
scheme
£ million

Share-based 
payments 
and deferred 
compensation
£ million

0.3
–
–
0.3
–
–

0.3

(1.0)
–
0.4
(0.6)
–
0.3

(0.3)

3.9
(0.3)
–
3.6
(0.1)
–

3.5

Total
£ million

3.2
(0.3)
0.4
3.3
(0.1)
0.3

3.5

As the group has been and is expected to continue to be consistently profitable, it is appropriate to recognise the full deferred 
tax assets.

7. Discontinued operations
On 5 January 2015, the group completed the sale of Close Brothers Seydler (“Seydler”) to Oddo & Cie for a gross cash 
consideration of €46.5 million (£36.4 million), which includes a post year end adjustment of £0.5 million following finalisation of 
completion accounts. The profit on disposal was £10.3 million.

Based in Frankfurt, Seydler provided equity and debt capital markets services, securities trading and research primarily in 
German small and mid-sized companies and was part of the Securities division.

The transaction fulfilled the requirements of IFRS 5 to be classified as “Discontinued operations” in the consolidated income 
statement, the results of which are set out below:

Results of discontinued operations

Operating income
Operating expenses
Operating profit before tax
Tax

Profit after tax

Profit on disposal of discontinued operations, net of tax
Profit from discontinued operations

1  Profit after tax is up until the point of disposal.

2016
£ million
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

20151
£ million
11.7
(10.4)
1.3
(0.4)

0.9

10.3
11.2

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continuedCash flow from discontinued operations

Net cash flow from operating activities
Net cash flow from investing activities
Net cash flow from financing activities

1  Up until the point of disposal.

105

2016
£ million
–
–
–

20151
£ million
6.6
(0.1)
–

8. Earnings per share
The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the profit attributable to shareholders and the number of basic 
weighted average shares. When calculating the diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is 
adjusted for the effects of all dilutive share options and awards.

Continuing operations
Basic
Diluted
Adjusted basic1
Adjusted diluted1

Continuing and discontinued operations
Basic
Diluted

Discontinued operations
Basic
Diluted

1  Excludes amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition discontinued operations and their tax effects.

Profit attributable to shareholders
Less profit from discontinued operations, net of tax
Profit attributable to shareholders on continuing operations
Adjustments:
Amortisation of intangible assets on acquisition
Tax effect of adjustments

Adjusted profit attributable to shareholders on continuing operations

Average number of shares
Basic weighted
Effect of dilutive share options and awards

Diluted weighted

9. Dividends

For each ordinary share
Final dividend for previous financial year paid in November 2015: 35.5p (2014: 32.5p)
Interim dividend for current financial year paid in April 2016: 19.0p (2015: 18.0p)

2016

2015

125.7p
124.3p
128.4p
127.0p

117.8p
116.5p
120.5p
119.2p

125.7p
124.3p

125.4p
124.0p

–
–

7.6p
7.5p

2016
£ million
186.5
–
186.5

2015
£ million
185.7
11.2
174.5

5.1
(1.0)

5.0
(1.0)

190.6

178.5

2016
million

2015
million

148.4
1.7

148.1
1.7

150.1

149.8

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

52.3
28.0

80.3

47.6
26.7

74.3

A final dividend relating to the year ended 31 July 2016 of 38.0p, amounting to an estimated £56.1 million, is proposed. 
This final dividend, which is due to be paid on 22 November 2016 to shareholders on the register at 14 October 2016, is not 
reflected in these financial statements.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements106

10. Loans and advances to banks

At 31 July 2016
At 31 July 2015

11. Loans and advances to customers

On demand
£ million
97.5
65.9

Within three 
months
£ million
7.2
7.4

Between 
three months 
and one year
£ million
4.0
–

Between 
one and 
two years
£ million
9.6
3.8

Between 
 two and 
 five years 
£ million
3.2
7.5

Total
£ million
121.5
84.6

At 31 July 2016
At 31 July 2015

On demand
£ million
58.1
45.4

Within three 
months
£ million
1,746.0
1,543.5

Between 
three months 
and one year
£ million
2,014.4
1,797.8

Between 
one and 
two years
£ million
1,279.3
1,108.2

Between 
two and 
five years
£ million
1,328.2
1,254.1

After  
more than 
five years
£ million
65.3
44.9

Impairment 
provisions
Total
£ million
£ million
(59.7) 6,431.6
(56.1) 5,737.8

Impairment provisions on loans and advances to customers
At 1 August
Charge for the year
Amounts written off net of recoveries

At 31 July

Loans and advances to customers comprise
Hire purchase agreement receivables
Finance lease receivables
Other loans and advances

At 31 July

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

56.1
37.9
(34.3)

48.3
41.9
(34.1)

59.7

56.1

2,782.4
440.1
3,209.1

2,552.9
473.0
2,711.9

6,431.6

5,737.8

At 31 July 2016, gross impaired loans were £158.5 million (31 July 2015: £162.3 million) and equate to 2% (31 July 2015: 3%) 
of the gross loan book before impairment provisions. The majority of the group’s lending is secured and therefore the gross 
impaired loans quoted do not reflect the expected loss.

The following table shows a reconciliation between gross investment in finance lease and hire purchase agreement 
receivables to present value of minimum lease and hire purchase payments:

Gross investment in finance leases and hire purchase agreement receivables due:
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Unearned finance income

Present value of minimum lease and hire purchase agreement payments

Of which due:
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

1,377.5
2,354.6
26.8
3,758.9
(512.4)

1,318.8
2,193.5
26.0
3,538.3
(494.1)

3,246.5

3,044.2

1,190.3
2,033.3
22.9

1,134.6
1,887.4
22.2

3,246.5

3,044.2

The aggregate cost of assets acquired for the purpose of letting under finance leases and hire purchase agreements was 
£5,602.9 million (2015: £5,182.8 million). The average effective interest rate on finance leases approximates to 10.3% (2015: 
10.6%). The present value of minimum lease and hire purchase agreement payments reflects the fair value of finance lease 
and hire purchase agreement receivables before deduction of impairment provisions.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued12. Debt securities

Long trading positions
Certificates of deposit
Gilts

At 31 July 2016

Long trading positions
Certificates of deposit
Gilts

At 31 July 2015

Movements on the book value of gilts comprise:

At 1 August 2014
Redemptions at maturity
Movement in value

At 31 July 2015

Redemptions at maturity
Movement in value

At 31 July 2016

13. Equity shares

Long trading positions
Other equity shares

Movements on the book value of other equity shares comprise:

At 1 August 2014
Disposals
Currency translation differences
Movement in value of:
Equity shares classified as available for sale

At 31 July 2015

Disposals
Currency translation differences
Movement in value of:
Equity shares classified as available for sale

At 31 July 2016

107

Held for 
trading
£ million
20.3
–
–

Available 
for sale
£ million
–
–
–

Loans and 
receivables
£ million
–
201.0
–

Total
£ million
20.3
201.0
–

20.3

–

201.0

221.3

Held for 
trading
£ million
14.1
–
–

Available 
for sale
£ million
–
–
20.1

Loans and 
receivables
£ million
–
115.3
–

Total
£ million
14.1
115.3
20.1

14.1

20.1

115.3

149.5

£ million
45.6
(25.0)
(0.5)

20.1

(20.0)
(0.1)

–

31 July
2015
£ million
31.1
10.1

31 July
2016
£ million
26.1
2.1

28.2

41.2

Available 
for sale
£ million
19.5
(8.1)
(0.4)

Fair value 
through  

profit or loss
£ million
0.1
–
–

(1.0)

10.0

(7.7)
0.4

(0.7)

2.0

–

0.1

–
–

–

0.1

Total
£ million
19.6
(8.1)
(0.4)

(1.0)

10.1

(7.7)
0.4

(0.7)

2.1

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements108

14. Derivative financial instruments
The group enters into derivative contracts with a number of financial institutions to minimise the impact of interest and 
currency rate changes to its financial instruments. The group’s total derivative asset and liability position as reported on  
the consolidated balance sheet is as follows:

Exchange rate contracts
Interest rate contracts

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

Notional
value
£ million
97.3
4,076.1

Assets
£ million
0.9
43.8

Liabilities
£ million
0.7
15.6

Notional
value
£ million
170.1
3,979.2

Assets
£ million
0.8
18.9

Liabilities
£ million
0.9
6.2

4,173.4

44.7

16.3

4,149.3

19.7

7.1

Notional amounts of interest rate contracts totalling £2,966.2 million (31 July 2015: £2,386.2 million) and exchange rate 
contracts totalling £nil (31 July 2015: £nil) have a residual maturity of more than one year.

Included in the derivatives above are the following cash flow and fair value hedges:

Cash flow hedges
Interest rate contracts
Fair value hedges
Interest rate contracts

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

Notional
value
£ million

Assets
£ million

Liabilities
£ million

Notional
value
£ million

Assets
£ million

Liabilities
£ million

1,228.5

0.8

10.1

1,339.7

0.5

1,070.7

30.0

–

1,328.8

16.9

3.8

0.4

The cash flow hedges relate to exposure to future interest payments or receipts on recognised financial instruments and on 
forecast transactions for periods of up to eight (2015: eight) years; there was immaterial ineffectiveness. The cash flow hedge 
amounts that were removed from equity and included in the consolidated income statement for the years ended 31 July 2016 
and 2015 were immaterial. The loss recognised in equity for cash flow hedges during the year was £4.4 million (2015: £4.4 
million loss).

The fair value hedges hedge the interest rate risk in recognised financial instruments; the loss on the hedged items was 
£23.7 million (2015: £14.9 million) which was offset by a gain of £23.8 million (2015: £15.0 million) on the hedging instrument.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued109

Goodwill
£ million

Software
£ million

Intangible
assets on
acquisition
£ million

Group total
£ million

Company
software
£ million

156.1
0.3
(10.4)
–

146.0
1.7
(6.9)
–

68.8
20.3
(8.1)
–

81.0
24.1
(0.5)
–

42.4
1.5
–
–

43.9
0.4
–
–

267.3
22.1
(18.5)
–

270.9
26.2
(7.4)
–

140.8

104.6

44.3

289.7

68.0
–
(6.2)

61.8
–
(6.9)

54.9

85.9

84.2

88.1

35.2
13.5
(6.5)

42.2
17.2
(0.3)

59.1

45.5

38.8

33.6

17.8
5.0
(0.1)

22.7
5.1
–

121.0
18.5
(12.8)

126.7
22.3
(7.2)

27.8

141.8

16.5

147.9

21.2

144.2

24.6

146.3

0.4
–
–
–

0.4
–
–
–

0.4

0.3
–
–

0.3
0.1
–

0.4

–

0.1

0.1

15. Intangible assets

Cost
At 1 August 2014
Additions
Disposals
Foreign exchange

At 31 July 2015
Additions
Disposals
Foreign exchange

At 31 July 2016

Amortisation and impairment
At 1 August 2014
Amortisation charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 July 2015
Amortisation charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 July 2016

Net book value at 31 July 2016

Net book value at 31 July 2015

Net book value at 1 August 2014

Additions in goodwill of £1.7 million and intangible assets on acquisition of £0.4 million in 2016 relates to the 100% acquisition 
of Finance for Industry Group (“FFI”). The principal activities of FFI are those of provision of instalment credit (mainly asset 
backed finance) to business customers to assist in their acquisition of business equipment and financial brokering to third 
party lenders. Cash consideration of £3.6 million was paid and a contingent consideration of £1.3 million is expected to be 
paid in the future for the equity of the business. Additions in goodwill of £0.3 million and intangible assets on acquisition of 
£1.5 million in 2015 relates to the 100% acquisition of Mackay Stewart and Brown Limited, a Scottish Independent Financial 
Adviser with £72.0 million of client assets, for cash consideration of £1.8 million for the equity of the business. These 
acquisitions are not regarded as material in the context of the group’s financial statements and therefore information required 
for material acquisitions by IFRS 3 has not been disclosed.

Disposal of £6.9 million goodwill in 2016 relates to the sale of Asset Management’s corporate advice and investment 
management activities. Disposal of £10.4 million goodwill in 2015 relates to the Seydler disposal of £4.2 million and the write 
off of fully impaired goodwill of £6.2 million relating to the wind up of Fortune Asset Management Limited. Intangible assets on 
acquisition relates to broker and customer relationships and are amortised over a period of eight to 20 years.

In the 2016 financial year, £5.1 million (2015: £5.0 million) of the amortisation charge is included in amortisation of intangible 
assets on acquisition and £17.2 million (2015: £13.5 million) of the amortisation charge is included in administrative expenses 
shown in the consolidated income statement.

Impairment tests for goodwill
At 31 July 2016, goodwill has been allocated to nine individual CGUs of which seven are within the Banking division, one is the 
Securities division and the remaining one is the Asset Management division. Goodwill impairment reviews are carried out 
annually by assessing the recoverable amount of the group’s CGUs, which is the higher of fair value less costs to sell and 
value in use. The recoverable amounts for all CGUs were measured based on value in use.

A value in use calculation uses discounted cash flow projections based on the most recent board approved budgets and 
three year plans to determine the recoverable amount of each CGU. The key assumptions underlying management’s three 
year plans, which are based on past experience and forecast market conditions, are expected market-making conditions in 
the Securities CGU, expected total client asset growth rate and revenue margin in the Asset Management CGU and expected 
loan book growth rates and net return on loan book in the Banking CGUs.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements110

15. Intangible assets continued
For cash flows beyond the group’s three year planning horizon, a terminal value was calculated using a prudent annual growth 
rate of 0% (2015: Banking division and Securities division 0%, Asset Management division 2%).

These cash flows are discounted using a pre-tax estimated weighted average cost of capital that reflects current market rates 
appropriate to the CGU as set out in the table below. For the 2016 calculation, the pre-tax discount rates have been adjusted 
in each year to reflect the expected future change in corporation tax rate in each CGU. As such, the pre-tax discount rates in 
the table are an average of the rate used in that CGU.

At 31 July 2016, the results of the review indicate there is no goodwill impairment. The inputs used in the value in use 
calculations are sensitive, primarily to the impact of changes in the assumptions for future cash flows, discount rates and 
long-term growth rates. Having performed stress tested value in use calculations, the group believes that any reasonably 
possible change in the key assumptions which have been used would not lead the carrying value of any CGU to exceed its 
recoverable amount.

Details of the CGUs in which the goodwill carrying amount is significant in comparison with total goodwill, together with the 
pre-tax discount rate used in determining value in use, are disclosed separately in the table below:

Cash generating unit
Winterflood Securities
Close Brothers Asset Management
Close Brothers Asset Finance
Other

16. Property, plant and equipment

Group
Cost
At 1 August 2014
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2015
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2016

Depreciation
At 1 August 2014
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 July 2015
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 July 2016

Net book value at 31 July 2016

Net book value at 31 July 2015

Net book value at 1 August 2014

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

Pre-tax  
discount rate 
%
15.3
11.0
13.0
11.7–13.0

Goodwill 
£ million
23.3
33.7
9.0
19.9

85.9

Pre-tax 
discount rate 
%
12.5
11.0
12.3
11.0–12.5

Goodwill 
£ million
23.3
33.7
7.4
19.8

84.2

Leasehold 
property
£ million

Fixtures,
fittings and
equipment
£ million

Assets
held under
operating
leases
£ million

Motor
vehicles
£ million

Total
£ million

10.1
7.4
(0.1)

17.4
4.3
(0.2)

34.9
7.7
(8.0)

34.6
9.2
(3.6)

132.7
43.7
(11.3)

165.1
61.6
(25.3)

1.2
–
(0.4)

0.8
0.1
(0.5)

178.9
58.8
(19.8)

217.9
75.2
(29.6)

21.5

40.2

201.4

0.4

263.5

5.7
1.6
(0.1)

7.2
2.5
–

9.7

11.8

10.2

4.4

26.7
4.5
(7.5)

23.7
4.6
(2.2)

28.9
16.7
(7.5)

38.1
19.6
(16.1)

26.1

41.6

14.1

159.8

10.9

127.0

8.2

103.8

0.6
0.1
(0.2)

0.5
0.1
(0.3)

0.3

0.1

0.3

0.6

61.9
22.9
(15.3)

69.5
26.8
(18.6)

77.7

185.8

148.4

117.0

The gain from the sale of assets held under operating leases for the year ended 31 July 2016 was £0.1 million (2015: £nil).

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued111

31 July
2016
£ million

31 July
2015
£ million

28.6
59.5
0.3

88.4

24.0
48.4
0.2

72.6

Leasehold 
property
£ million

Fixtures,
fittings and
equipment
£ million

Total
£ million

3.1
0.1

3.2
–
(0.5)

2.7

2.1
0.7

2.8
0.1
(0.2)

2.7

–

0.4

1.0

1.4
–

1.4
–
(0.1)

1.3

1.3
–

1.3
–
–

1.3

–

0.1

0.1

4.5
0.1

4.6
–
(0.6)

4.0

3.4
0.7

4.1
0.1
(0.2)

4.0

–

0.5

1.1

Group

Company

31 July
2016
£ million
1.1
10.7

31 July
2015
£ million
0.7
9.5

31 July
2016
£ million
–
–

31 July
2015
£ million
–
0.4

11.8

10.2

–

0.4

Future minimum lease rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Company
Cost
At 1 August 2014
Additions

At 31 July 2015
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2016

Depreciation
At 1 August 2014
Charge for the year

At 31 July 2015
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 July 2016

Net book value at 31 July 2016

Net book value at 31 July 2015

Net book value at 1 August 2014

The net book value of leasehold property comprises:

Long leasehold property
Short leasehold property

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements112

17. Other assets and other liabilities

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets
Prepayments and accrued income
Trade and other receivables

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities
Accruals and deferred income
Trade and other payables
Provisions

Provisions movement in the year:

Group
At 1 August 2014
Additions
Utilised
Released

At 31 July 2015
Additions
Utilised
Released

At 31 July 2016

Company
At 1 August 2014
Additions
Utilised
Released

At 31 July 2015
Additions
Utilised
Released

At 31 July 2016

31 July
2016
£ million

31 July
2015
£ million

99.5
34.6

83.5
34.3

134.1

117.8

119.5
70.2
15.7

116.3
71.3
21.4

205.4

209.0

Claims 
£ million

Property 
£ million

Other 
£ million

Total 
£ million

0.7
0.6
(0.3)
(0.6)

0.4
0.2
(0.2)
(0.3)

0.1

10.9
3.7
(2.4)
(1.0)

11.2
1.4
(1.7)
(2.6)

8.3

10.4
4.2
(4.7)
(0.1)

9.8
3.5
(5.5)
(0.5)

7.3

22.0
8.5
(7.4)
(1.7)

21.4
5.1
(7.4)
(3.4)

15.7

Property 
£ million

Other 
£ million

Total 
£ million

2.2
–
–
–

2.2
–
–
(0.3)

1.9

8.6
2.9
(4.0)
–

7.5
2.4
(4.5)
(0.3)

5.1

10.8
2.9
(4.0)
–

9.7
2.4
(4.5)
(0.6)

7.0

Claims and other items for which provisions are made arise in the normal course of business and include those related to 
employee benefits. The timing and outcome of these claims and other items are uncertain. Property provisions are in respect 
of leaseholds where rents payable exceed the value to the group, in respect of potential dilapidations and onerous leases. 
These property provisions will be utilised and released over the remaining lives of the leases which range from one to nine years.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued113

31 July
2016 
£ million
456.3

5.8
13.5
19.3

31 July
2015 
£ million
376.5

13.7
14.1
27.8

475.6

404.3

Within 
three
months
£ million
1.9
918.0
207.8
7.1

Between
three 
months and
one year
£ million
26.5
2,117.3
160.1
557.1

Between
one and 
two years
£ million
10.1
1,233.4
90.2
201.5

Between
two and 
five years
£ million
0.7
495.1
–
589.1

After
more than
five years
£ million
–
–
–
37.8

Total
£ million
71.1
4,894.6
469.1
1,422.8

On demand
£ million
31.9
130.8
11.0
30.2

18. Settlement balances and short positions

Settlement balances
Short positions held for trading:
Debt securities
Equity shares

19. Financial liabilities

Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue

At 31 July 2016

203.9

1,134.8

2,861.0

1,535.2

1,084.9

37.8

6,857.6

Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue

On demand
£ million
11.5
154.8
8.6
11.2

Within three
months
£ million
0.3
828.4
99.1
6.7

Between
three months
and one year
£ million
22.8
2,347.7
123.7
1.1

Between
one and
two years
£ million
0.5
851.2
59.9
747.8

Between
two and 
 five years
£ million
–
299.3
89.9
299.3

After
more than
five years
£ million
–
–
–
298.9

Total
£ million
35.1
4,481.4
381.2
1,365.0

At 31 July 2015

186.1

934.5

2,495.3

1,659.4

688.5

298.9

6,262.7

At 31 July 2016, the company held £205.9 million (31 July 2015: £205.6 million) debt securities in issue.

As discussed in note 28(c) the group has repurchase agreements at 31 July 2016 whereby £451.0 million (31 July 2015: 
£375.0 million) Treasury Bills have been drawn and lent in exchange for cash which is included within loans and overdrafts 
from banks above. Residual maturities of the repurchase agreements are as follows:

At 31 July 2016
At 31 July 2015

20. Subordinated loan capital

Final maturity date
2026
2026

On demand
£ million
–
–

Within three
months
£ million
197.8
99.1

Between
three months
and one year
£ million
160.1
123.7

Between
one and
two years
£ million
90.2
59.9

Between
two and 
 five years
£ million
–
89.9

After
more than
five years
£ million
–
–

Total
£ million
448.1
372.6

Prepayment
date

Initial
 interest
rate

31 July
2016
£ million

31 July
2015
£ million

2021
2021

7.42%
7.62%

15.5
30.9

46.4

15.5
30.9

46.4

All the subordinated loan capital has been issued by Close Brothers Limited (“CBL”) and is denominated in sterling. If CBL 
opts not to prepay at the prepayment date, the interest rate is reset to a margin over the yield on five year UK Treasury 
securities. In March 2015 CBL exercised its option to prepay £30.0 million of its subordinated loan capital.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements114

21. Share capital

Group and company
Allotted, issued and fully paid
Ordinary shares of 25p each

22. Capital

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

million

£ million

million

£ million

150.6

37.7

150.6

37.7

The group’s policy is to be well capitalised and its approach to capital management is driven by strategic and organisational 
requirements, while also taking into account the regulatory and commercial environments in which it operates.

The Prudential Regulation Authority (“PRA”) supervises the group on a consolidated basis and receives information on the 
capital adequacy of, and sets capital requirements for, the group as a whole. In addition, a number of subsidiaries are 
regulated for prudential purposes by either the PRA or the Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”). The aim of the capital 
adequacy regime is to promote safety and soundness in the financial system. It is structured around three “pillars”: Pillar 1 on 
minimum capital requirements; Pillar 2 on the supervisory review process; and Pillar 3 on market discipline. The group’s Pillar 
1 information is presented on page 115. Under Pillar 2, the group completes an annual self assessment of risks known as the 
“Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process” (“ICAAP”). The ICAAP is reviewed by the PRA which culminates in the PRA 
setting “Individual Capital Guidance” (“ICG”) on the level of capital the group and its regulated subsidiaries are required to hold. 
Pillar 3 requires firms to publish a set of disclosures which allow market participants to assess information on that firm’s 
capital, risk exposures and risk assessment process. The group’s Pillar 3 disclosures can be found on the group’s website 
www.closebrothers.com/investor-relations/investor-information/results-reports-and-presentations.

The group maintains a strong capital base to support the development of the business and to ensure the group meets the 
Pillar 1 capital requirements and ICG at all times. As a result, the group maintains capital adequacy ratios above minimum 
regulatory requirements. The group’s individual regulated entities complied with all of the externally imposed capital 
requirements to which they are subject for the years ended 31 July 2016 and 2015.

A full analysis of the composition of regulatory capital and Pillar 1 risk weighted assets, a reconciliation between equity and 
common equity tier 1 capital after deductions and a table showing the movement in common equity tier 1 during the year are 
shown on the following pages.

At 31 July 2016, the group’s common equity tier 1 capital ratio was 13.5% (31 July 2015: 13.7%).

Common equity tier 1 capital increased to £901.4 million (31 July 2015: £813.2 million) primarily due to growth in profit 
attributable to shareholders.

Risk weighted assets increased to £6,682.5 million (31 July 2015: £5,932.1 million) as a result of growth in credit and 
counterparty risk associated with the loan book. Notional risk weighted assets for operational risk also increased reflecting 
increased performance over recent years.

The composition of capital remained broadly stable with 97.4% (31 July 2015: 95.9%) of the total capital consisting of common 
equity tier 1 capital.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continuedCommon equity tier 1 capital
Called up share capital
Share premium account
Retained earnings
Other reserves recognised for common equity tier 1 capital
Deductions from common equity tier 1 capital
Intangible assets, net of associated deferred tax liabilities
Foreseeable dividend1
Investment in own shares
Pension asset, net of associated deferred tax liabilities
Prudent valuation adjustment

Common equity tier 1 capital

Tier 2 capital
Subordinated debt2
Unrealised gains on available for sale equity shares

Tier 2 capital

Total regulatory capital

Risk weighted assets (notional) – unaudited
Credit and counterparty credit risk
Operational risk3
Market risk3

Common equity tier 1 capital ratio
Total capital ratio

115

31 July
2016
£ million

37.7
284.0
797.5
21.8

(145.3)
(56.1)
(37.2)
(0.9)
(0.1)

31 July
2015
£ million

37.7
284.0
694.4
18.3

(140.6)
(52.4)
(25.6)
(2.5)
(0.1)

901.4

813.2

24.0
–

24.0

31.5
3.3

34.8

925.4

848.0

5,824.9
784.9
72.7

5,103.2
753.5
75.4

6,682.5

5,932.1

13.5% 13.7%
13.8% 14.3%

1  Under the Regulatory Technical Standard on own funds, a deduction has been recognised at 31 July 2016 and 31 July 2015 for a foreseeable dividend being the 

proposed final dividend as set out in note 9.

2  Shown after applying the Capital Requirements Regulation’s transitional and qualifying own funds arrangements.
3  Operational and market risk include a notional adjustment at 8% in order to determine notional risk weighted assets.

The following table shows a reconciliation between equity and common equity tier 1 capital after deductions:

Equity
Regulatory deductions from equity:
Intangible assets, net of associated deferred tax liabilities
Foreseeable dividend1
Pension asset, net of associated deferred tax liabilities
Prudent valuation adjustment
Other reserves not recognised for common equity tier 1 capital:
Available for sale movements reserve
Cash flow hedging reserve
Non-controlling interests

Common equity tier 1 capital

31 July
2016
£ million
1,096.9

31 July
2015
£ million
1,009.9

(145.3)
(56.1)
(0.9)
(0.1)

(140.6)
(52.4)
(2.5)
(0.1)

–
6.7
0.2

(3.3)
2.3
(0.1)

901.4

813.2

1  Under the Regulatory Technical Standard on own funds, a deduction has been recognised at 31 July 2016 and 31 July 2015 for a foreseeable dividend being the 

proposed final dividend as set out in note 9.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements 
116

22. Capital continued

The following table shows the movement in common equity tier 1 capital during the year:

Common equity tier 1 capital at 31 July 2015
Profit in the period attributable to shareholders
Dividends paid and foreseen
Other movements in retained reserves
Decrease in share-based payments reserve
Increase in exchange movements reserve
Increase in intangible assets, net of associated deferred tax liabilities
Decrease in pension assets, net of associated deferred tax liabilities

Common equity tier 1 capital at 31 July 2016

£ million
813.2
186.5
(84.0)
(3.1)
(9.8)
1.7
(4.7)
1.6

901.4

23. Contingent liabilities, guarantees and commitments
Contingent liabilities
Financial Services Compensation Scheme (“FSCS”)
A principal subsidiary of the group, CBL, by virtue of being a regulated deposit-taker, contributes to the FSCS which provides 
compensation to customers of financial institutions in the event that an institution is unable, or is likely to be unable, to pay 
claims against it. The FSCS raises levies on UK licensed deposit-taking institutions to meet such claims based on their share 
of UK deposits on 31 December of the year preceding the scheme year (which runs from 1 April to 31 March). At 31 July 
2016, the group has accrued £1.0 million (2015: £1.9 million) for its share of levies that will be raised by the FSCS.

Compensation has previously been paid out by the FSCS funded by loan facilities provided by HM Treasury to FSCS in 
support of the FSCS’s obligations to the depositors of banks declared in default. The facilities are expected to be repaid 
wholly from recoveries from the failed deposit-takers, except for an estimated shortfall of £1.0 billion which the FSCS is 
recovering by levying the industry in three equal annual instalments beginning in 2013/2014, in addition to the ongoing interest 
charges on the outstanding loans.

The amount of future levies payable by the group depends on a number of factors including the potential recoveries of assets 
by the FSCS, the group’s participation in the deposit-taking market at 31 December, the level of protected deposits and the 
population of FSCS members.

Guarantees

Guarantees and irrevocable letters of credit

Group

Company

31 July
2016 
£ million
143.2

31 July
2015 
£ million
136.7

31 July
2016 
£ million
156.2

31 July
2015 
£ million
159.0

Where the group undertakes to make a payment on behalf of its subsidiaries for guarantees issued, such as bank facilities or 
property leases or as irrevocable letters of credit for which an obligation to make a payment to a third party has not arisen at 
the reporting date, they are included in these consolidated financial statements as contingent liabilities.

Commitments
Undrawn facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend

Within one year
After more than one year

1  Following review of the application of our policy prior year numbers have been re-presented for comparability.

31 July
2016
£ million
934.2
28.5

31 July
20151
£ million
766.6
95.8

962.7

862.4

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued117

Operating lease commitments
Minimum operating lease payments recognised in the consolidated income statement amounted to £8.6 million (2015: £10.8 
million).

The group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases, 
which fall due as follows:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

Premises
£ million
10.8
39.1
12.2

Other
£ million
2.8
3.9
–

Premises
£ million
10.4
39.3
15.8

Other
£ million
2.7
3.8
–

62.1

6.7

65.5

6.5

Other commitments
Subsidiaries had contracted capital commitments relating to capital expenditure of £12.1 million (2015: £15.1 million).

24. Related party transactions
Transactions with key management
Details of directors’ remuneration and interests in shares are disclosed in the Report of the Board on Directors’ Remuneration 
on pages 60 to 81.

Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the 
activities of an entity; the group’s key management are the members of the group’s Executive Committee, which includes all 
executive directors, together with its non-executive directors.

The table below details, on an aggregated basis, key management personnel emoluments:

Emoluments
Salaries and fees
Benefits and allowances
Performance related awards in respect of the current year:
Cash
Deferred

Share-based awards

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

3.9
0.7

3.4
2.9
10.9
4.5

15.4

3.6
0.7

3.4
3.0
10.7
5.7

16.4

Gains upon exercise of options by key management personnel, expensed to the income statement in previous years, totalled 
£14.8 million (2015: £20.3 million).

Key management have banking relationships with group entities which are entered into in the normal course of business. 
Amounts included in deposits by customers at 31 July 2016 attributable, in aggregate, to key management were £1.8 million 
(31 July 2015: £2.3 million).

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements118

25. Pensions
The group operates defined contribution pension schemes for eligible employees as well as a defined benefit pension scheme 
which is closed to new members and further accrual. Assets of all schemes are held separately from those of the group.

Defined contribution schemes
During the year the charge to the consolidated income statement for the group’s defined contribution pension schemes was 
£10.0 million (2015: £9.3 million) representing contributions payable by the group and is included in administrative expenses.

Defined benefit pension scheme
The group’s only defined benefit pension scheme (“the scheme”) is a final salary scheme which operates under trust law. The 
scheme is managed and administered in accordance with the scheme’s Trust Deed and Rules and all relevant legislation by a 
trustee board made up of trustees nominated by both the company and the members.

The scheme was closed to new entrants in August 1996 and closed to further accrual during 2012. At 31 July 2016 this 
scheme had 50 (2015: 61) deferred members and 44 (2015: 35) pensioners and dependants.

Funding position
The scheme’s most recent triennial actuarial valuation at 31 July 2015 showed that the scheme was fully funded. As such, no 
further contributions are scheduled.

IAS 19 (Revised) valuation
The following disclosures are reported in accordance with IAS 19 (Revised). Significant actuarial assumptions are as follows:

Inflation rate (RPI)
Inflation rate (CPI)
Discount rate for scheme liabilities1
Expected interest/expected long-term return on plan assets
Mortality assumptions2:
Existing pensioners from age 65, life expectancy (years):
Men
Women
Non-retired members currently aged 50, life expectancy from age 65 (years):
Men
Women

2016
%
2.9
1.9
2.4
2.4

24.3
25.8

25.0
27.8

2015
%
3.3
2.3
3.6
3.6

24.6
26.0

25.3
28.1

1   Based on market yields at 31 July 2016 and 2015 on high quality sterling-denominated corporate bonds, adjusted to be consistent with the estimated term of the 

post employment benefit obligation, using the Willis Towers Watson model “Global RATE:Link”.

2   Based on standard tables SAPS S1 Light produced by the CMI Bureau of the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries with adjusted mortality multipliers for pensioners and 
non-pensioners, together with projected future improvements in line with the CMI 2014 (2015: CMI 2011) core projection model with a long-term trend of 1.5% per 
annum.

The surplus of the scheme disclosed below has been accounted for as an asset of the group within note 17 Other assets and 
other liabilities.

The group has the unconditional right to any surpluses that arise within the scheme once all benefits have been secured in full. 
As such no asset ceiling has been applied, and accordingly the scheme surplus is recognised on the consolidated balance 
sheet.

Fair value of scheme assets:
Equities
Bonds
Cash
Total fair value of scheme assets
Present value of scheme liabilities

Surplus

2016
£ million

2015
£ million

2014
£ million

2013
£ million

2012
£ million

35.9
8.7
0.2
44.8
(43.6)

33.0
8.5
0.2
41.7
(38.6)

31.8
7.9
0.2
39.9
(35.0)

30.7
7.4
–
38.1
(31.9)

 28.1
 7.0
 –
 35.1
 (34.7)

1.2

3.1

4.9

6.2

0.4

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continuedMovement in the present value of scheme liabilities during the year:

Carrying amount at 1 August
Interest expense
Benefits paid
Actuarial losses

Carrying amount at 31 July

Movement in the fair value of scheme assets during the year:

Carrying amount at 1 August
Interest income
Benefits paid
Administrative costs paid
Return on scheme assets, excluding interest income

Carrying amount at 31 July

Historical experience of actuarial gains/(losses) are shown below:

119

2016
£ million
(38.6)
(1.4)
1.9
(5.5)

2015
£ million
(35.0)
(1.4)
2.7
(4.9)

(43.6)

(38.6)

2016
£ million
41.7
1.5
(1.9)
(0.2)
3.6

2015
£ million
39.9
1.6
(2.7)
–
2.9

44.7

41.7

Experience gains/(losses) on scheme assets
Experience gains/(losses) on scheme liabilities
Impact of changes in assumptions on scheme liabilities
Total actuarial (losses)/gains on scheme liabilities

2016
£ million
3.6
1.3
(6.8)
(5.5)

2015
£ million
2.9
–
(4.9)
(4.9)

2014
£ million
1.7
(0.1)
(3.2)
(3.3)

2013
£ million
4.6
0.5
(2.7)
(2.2)

2012
£ million
 (0.8)
 0.6
 2.0
 2.6

Total actuarial (losses)/gains

(1.9)

(2.0)

(1.6)

2.4

1.8

Total actuarial losses have been recognised in other comprehensive income. Income of £0.1 million (2015: £0.2 million) from 
the interest on the scheme surplus has been recognised within administrative expenses in the consolidated income statement.

The valuation of the scheme’s liabilities is sensitive to the key assumptions used in the valuation. The effect of a change in 
those assumptions in 2016 and 2015 is set out below. The analysis reflects the variation of the individual assumptions. The 
variation in price inflation includes all inflation-linked pension increases in deferment and in payment.

Impact on defined benefit obligation  
increase/(decrease)

2016

2015

Key assumption
Discount rate
Price inflation (RPI and CPI)
Mortality

Sensitivity
0.25% increase
0.25% increase
Increase in life expectancy at age 65 by one year

%
(5.0)
2.0
3.0

£ million
(2.2)
0.9
1.3

%
(5.0)
2.5
3.0

£ million
(1.9)
1.0
1.2

Changes in the assumptions used in the valuation due to external factors would affect the carrying value of the scheme. The 
most significant risks are:
•  Market factors (movements in equity and bond markets): 80% of the scheme’s assets are invested in global equities and the 
scheme’s liabilities are measured with reference to corporate bond yields. The performance of both of these asset classes 
can be volatile. Underperformance of either of these markets would have an adverse impact on the carrying value of the 
scheme.

•  Inflation: Deferred pensions and pensions in payment increase at specified periods in line with inflation subject to certain 

caps and floors in place. Changes in inflation may impact scheme liabilities.

•  Life expectancy: Change in the life expectancy of the scheme’s members may impact scheme liabilities.

The weighted average duration of the benefit payments reflected in the scheme liabilities is 18 years.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements120

26. Share-based awards
The 1995 Executive Share Option Scheme (“ESOS”), Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) scheme, 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan 
(“LTIP”), Deferred Share Awards (“DSA”) and Share Matching Plan (“SMP”) share-based awards have been granted under the 
group’s share schemes. The general terms and conditions for these share-based awards are described in the Report of the 
Board on Directors’ Remuneration on pages 60 to 81.

In order to satisfy a number of the awards below the company has purchased company shares into Treasury and the Close 
Brothers Group Employee Share Trust has purchased company shares. At 31 July 2016, 0.7 million (2015: 1.2 million) and  
2.4 million (2015: 1.7 million) of these shares were held respectively and in total £37.2 million (2015: £25.6 million) was 
recognised within the share-based payments reserve. During the year £12.9 million (2015: £20.5 million) of these shares were 
released to satisfy share-based awards to employees. The share-based payments reserve as shown in the consolidated 
statement of changes in equity also includes the cumulative position in relation to unvested share-based awards charged to 
the consolidated income statement of £22.9 million (2015: £21.1 million). The share-based awards charge of £6.2 million (2015: 
£7.8 million) is included in administrative expenses shown in the consolidated income statement.

Movements in the number of share-based awards outstanding and their weighted average share prices are as follows:

ESOS

SAYE

LTIP

DSA1

SMP

Weighted
average
exercise
price

Weighted
average
exercise
price

Number
Number
At 1 August 2014 133,656 655.6p 1,300,340
Granted
Exercised
Forfeited
Lapsed

–
(13,147) 656.0p
–
–
(120,509) 655.5p

272,172 1,143.0p
(389,471) 559.0p
(37,614) 1,049.2p
(66,703) 940.5p

Number
825.4p 2,047,693
510,680
(796,622)
–
(52,932)

–

Weighted
average
exercise
price
–
–
–
–
–

Number
730,860
276,675
(435,116)
(18,539)
–

Weighted
average
exercise
price

Number
– 1,295,613
373,938
–
(541,517)
–
–
–
(18,001)
–

Weighted
average
exercise
price
–
–
–
–
–

At 31 July 2015

Granted
Exercised
Forfeited
Lapsed

At 31 July 2016

Exercisable at:
31 July 2016
31 July 2015

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

– 1,078,724

– 1,708,819

–
–
–
–

282,824 1,197.0p
(170,580) 683.0p
(152,374) 1,103.0p
(5,124) 1,064.8p

458,171
(664,198)
(908)
(38,429)

– 1,033,470

– 1,463,455

–
–

–
658

–
547.0p

–
13,878

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

553,880

– 1,110,033

288,188
(294,066)
(9,367)
–

–
–
–
–

368,967
(337,322)
–
(5,855)

538,635

– 1,135,823

11,461
38,471

–
–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

1 

Includes all awards made under the group’s DSA and Matching and Restricted awards granted to new employees on commencement of employment with the group.

The table below shows the weighted average market price at the date of exercise:

ESOS
SAYE
LTIP
DSA
SMP

2016
–
1,356.9p
1,453.6p
1,481.2p
1,539.7p

2015
1,430.0p
1,513.4p
1,480.9p
1,463.2p
1,470.5p

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued121

The range of exercise prices and weighted average remaining contractual life of awards and options outstanding are as 
follows:

SAYE
Between £5 and £6
Between £6 and £7
Between £9 and £10
Between £11 and £12
LTIP
Nil
DSA
Nil
SMP
Nil

Total

2016 
Options outstanding

2015 
Options outstanding

Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life
Years

0.8
1.8
1.5
2.4

Number
outstanding

31,635
18,919
266,807
716,109

Number
outstanding

71,327
141,035
304,139
562,223

1,463,455

2.2 1,708,819

538,635

1.6

553,880

1,135,823

2.1 1,110,033

4,171,383

2.1 4,451,456

Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life
Years

1.4
1.1
2.5
3.0

2.1

1.4

2.2

2.1

For the share-based awards granted during the year, the weighted average fair value of those options at 31 July 2016 was 
937.1p (2015: 945.2p). The main assumptions for the valuation of these share-based awards comprised:

Exercise period
SAYE
1 December 2018 to 31 May 2019
1 December 2020 to 31 May 2021
LTIP
29 September 2018 to 28 September 2019
29 September 2020 to 28 September 2021
DSA
29 September 2016 to 28 September 2019
21 November 2016 to 20 November 2018
15 March 2016 to 14 March 2019
SMP
29 September 2018 to 29 September 2019

Share price
at issue

Exercise
price

Expected
volatility

Expected
option life
 in years

Dividend
yield

Risk free
interest rate

1,495.0p 1,197.0p
1,495.0p 1,197.0p

1,470.0p
1,470.0p

1,493.4p
1,580.3p
1,497.0p

1,470.0p

–
–

–
–
–

–

20.0%
21.0%

20.0%
20.0%

–
–
–

20.0%

3
5

3
5

–
–
–

3

3.6%
3.6%

3.6%
3.6%

–
–
–

0.7%
1.2%

0.8%
1.3%

–
–
–

3.6%

0.8%

Expected volatility was determined mainly by reviewing share price volatility for the expected life of each option up to the date 
of grant.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements122

27. Consolidated cash flow statement reconciliation

(a) Reconciliation of operating profit before tax to net cash inflow from operating activities
Operating profit before tax from continuing operations
Profit before tax on discontinued operations
Tax paid
Depreciation and amortisation
(Increase)/decrease in:
Interest receivable and prepaid expenses
Net settlement balances and trading positions
Net loans to/from money broker against stock advanced
Interest payable and accrued expenses

Net cash inflow from trading activities
(Increase)/decrease in:
Loans and advances to banks not repayable on demand
Loans and advances to customers
Assets let under operating leases
Certificates of deposit
Gilts
Other assets less other liabilities
Increase/(decrease) in:
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue, net of transaction costs

Net cash inflow from operating activities

(b)  Analysis of net cash outflow in respect of the purchase of subsidiaries and  

non-controlling interests

Cash consideration paid

(c) Analysis of net cash inflow in respect of the sale of a subsidiary
Cash consideration received
Cash and cash equivalents disposed of

(d) Analysis of changes in financing activities
Share capital (including premium), group bond and subordinated loan capital1:
Opening balance
Prepayment of subordinated loan capital
Shares issued for cash

(e) Analysis of cash and cash equivalents2
Cash and balances at central banks
Loans and advances to banks repayable on demand

1  Excludes accrued interest.
2  Excludes Bank of England cash reserve account and amounts held as collateral.

31 July
2016 
£ million

31 July
2015
£ million

228.5
–
(53.7)
49.1

(16.0)
(9.7)
16.0
3.2

219.9
11.6
(53.4)
41.4

(4.2)
22.8
(2.9)
8.2

217.4

243.4

(26.7)
(693.8)
(51.9)
(85.7)
20.0
28.9

36.0
413.2
87.9
35.9

1.6
(448.1)
(39.8)
(115.3)
25.0
(19.1)

(14.5)
(23.0)
371.8
–

(18.8)

(18.0)

(3.6)

(1.0)

2.4
(0.1)

36.9
(13.7)

2.3

23.2

566.6
–
–

596.5
(30.0)
0.1

566.6

566.6

840.6
82.7

1,031.2
72.5

923.3

1,103.7

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued 
123

28. Financial risk management
As a financial services group, financial instruments are central to the group’s activities. The risk associated with financial 
instruments represents a significant component of those faced by the group and is analysed in more detail below.

The group’s financial risk management objectives are summarised within the Risk and Control Framework in Corporate 
Governance on pages 51 and 52. Details of the significant accounting policies and methods adopted, including the criteria for 
recognition, the basis of measurement and the basis on which income and expenses are recognised, in respect of each class 
of financial asset, financial liability and equity instrument are disclosed in note 1.

(a) Classification
The following tables analyse the group’s assets and liabilities in accordance with the categories of financial instruments in 
IAS 39.

At 31 July 2016
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Debt securities
Equity shares
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial assets

Liabilities
Settlement balances and short positions
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue
Loans from money brokers against stock 

advanced

Subordinated loan capital
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial liabilities

Designated 
at fair value 
through 
profit or 
loss 
£ million

Held for 
trading 
£ million

Available 
for sale 
£ million

Loans and 
receivables 
£ million

Held at 
amortised 
cost 
£ million

Derivatives 
held for 
hedging 
£ million

Total 
£ million

–
–
–
–
20.3
26.1
–
4.8
–

51.2

19.3
–
–
–
–

–
–
6.1
–

25.4

–
–
–
–
–
0.1
–
–
–

0.1

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
0.1
–

0.1

–
–
–
–
–
2.0
–
–
–

847.4
478.1
121.5
6,431.6
201.0
–
52.4
–
42.3

2.0

8,174.3

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

456.3
71.1
4,894.6
469.1
1,422.8

30.0
46.4
–
124.8

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
39.9
–

847.4
478.1
121.5
6,431.6
221.3
28.2
52.4
44.7
42.3

39.9

8,267.5

–
–
–
–
–

475.6
71.1
4,894.6
469.1
1,422.8

–
–
10.1
–

30.0
46.4
16.3
124.8

7,515.1

10.1

7,550.7

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements124

28. Financial risk management continued

At 31 July 2015
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Debt securities
Equity shares
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial assets

Liabilities
Settlement balances and short positions
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue
Loans from money brokers against stock 

advanced

Subordinated loan capital
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial liabilities

Designated 
at fair value 
through 
profit or loss 
£ million

Held for 
trading 
£ million

Available for 
sale 
£ million

Loans and 
receivables 
£ million

Held at 
amortised 
cost 
£ million

Derivatives 
held for 
hedging 
£ million

Total 
£ million

–
–
–
–
14.1
31.1
–
2.3
–

47.5

27.8
–
–
–
–

–
–
2.9
–

30.7

–
–
–
–
–
0.1
–
–
–

0.1

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
20.1
10.0
–
–
–

1,038.0
398.3
84.6
5,737.8
115.3
–
38.4
–
36.5

30.1

7,448.9

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

376.5
35.1
4,481.4
381.2
1,365.0

–
46.4
–
105.0

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
17.4
–

1,038.0
398.3
84.6
5,737.8
149.5
41.2
38.4
19.7
36.5

17.4

7,544.0

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
4.2
–

404.3
35.1
4,481.4
381.2
1,365.0

–
46.4
7.1
105.0

6,790.6

4.2

6,825.5

(b) Valuation
The fair values of the group’s financial assets and liabilities are not materially different from their carrying values, with the 
exception of the following:

Subordinated loan capital
Debt securities in issue

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

Fair  

value
52.4
1,432.2

Carrying 
value
46.4
1,422.8

Fair  

value
56.9
1,383.3

Carrying 
value
46.4
1,365.0

Valuation hierarchy
The group holds financial instruments that are measured at fair value subsequent to initial recognition. Each instrument has 
been categorised within one of three levels using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in 
making the measurements. These levels are based on the degree to which the fair value is observable and are defined as 
follows:
•  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or 
liabilities where prices are readily available and represent actual and regularly occurring market transactions on an arm’s 
length basis. An active market is one in which transactions occur with sufficient frequency to provide ongoing pricing 
information;

•  Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices in less active markets for identical assets or liabilities 
or those derived from inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly as prices or 
indirectly derived from prices; and

•  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that 

are not based on observable market data (“unobservable inputs”).

Investments classified as Level 1 predominantly comprise UK government securities and liquid listed equity shares.

Investments classified as Level 2 predominantly comprise less liquid listed equity shares, investment grade corporate bonds 
and over the counter derivatives.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued125

At 31 July 2016, investments classified as Level 3 predominantly comprise a legacy investment property fund. The valuation  
of this investment is determined using its net asset value which is updated quarterly. The group believes that there is no 
reasonably possible change to the inputs used in the valuation of this position which would have a material effect on the 
group’s consolidated income statement.

In 2016 a number of listed equity shares have been classified as Level 2 (classified as Level 1 in 2015) following an assessment 
of the frequency of transactions in these shares. The prior year has been re-presented for comparability. Aside from this there 
were no significant transfers between Level 1, 2 and 3 in 2016 and 2015.

The tables below show the classification of financial instruments held at fair value into the valuation hierarchy.

At 31 July 2016
Assets
Debt securities:
Long positions in debt securities held for trading
Gilts classified as available for sale
Equity shares:
Held for trading
Fair value through profit or loss
Available for sale
Derivative financial instruments

Liabilities
Short positions held for trading:
Debt securities
Equity shares
Derivative financial instruments

At 31 July 2015
Assets
Debt securities:
Long positions in debt securities held for trading
Gilts classified as available for sale
Equity shares:
Held for trading
Fair value through profit or loss
Available for sale
Derivative financial instruments

Liabilities
Short positions held for trading:
Debt securities
Equity shares
Derivative financial instruments

Level 1 
£ million

Level 2 
£ million

Level 3 
£ million

Total 
£ million

16.1
–

3.4
–
–
–

19.5

3.0
3.7
–

6.7

4.2
–

22.7
0.1
–
44.7

71.7

2.8
9.8
16.3

28.9

–
–

–
–
2.0
–

2.0

–
–
–

–

20.3
–

26.1
0.1
2.0
44.7

93.2

5.8
13.5
16.3

35.6

Level 1 
£ million

Level 2 
£ million

Level 3 
£ million

Total 
£ million

12.6
20.1

6.1
–
–
–

38.8

11.3
3.9
–

15.2

1.5
–

25.0
0.1
–
19.7

46.3

2.4
10.2
7.1

19.7

–
–

–
–
10.0
–

10.0

–
–
–

–

14.1
20.1

31.1
0.1
10.0
19.7

95.1

13.7
14.1
7.1

34.9

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements126

28. Financial risk management continued
Movements in financial assets categorised as Level 3 were:

At 1 August 2014
Total gains recognised in the consolidated income statement
Total gains recognised in other comprehensive income
Sales and settlements
Transfers out

At 31 July 2015
Total losses recognised in the consolidated income statement
Total losses recognised in other comprehensive income
Sales and settlements
Transfers out

At 31 July 2016

Equity shares

Available
for sale
£ million
19.5
(0.9)
(0.5)
(8.1)
–

10.0
(0.3)
–
(7.7)
–

2.0

Fair value
through
profit/(loss)
£ million
0.1
–
–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–
–
–

–

The losses recognised in the consolidated income statement relating to instruments held at the year end amounted to £0.3 
million (2015: £0.9 million).

(c) Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings and/or value, as a result of the failure of a counterparty or associated party with 
whom the group has contracted to meet its obligations as they fall due. Credit risk across the group mainly arises through the 
lending and treasury activities of the Banking division.

The Banking division applies consistent and prudent lending criteria to mitigate credit risk. Its lending activities are 
predominantly secured across a diverse range of asset classes and are generally short term in nature with low average loan 
size. This ensures concentration risk is controlled in both the loan book and associated collateral.

The group has established limits for all counterparties with whom it places deposits, enters into derivative contracts or whose 
debt securities are held and the credit quality of the counterparties is monitored. While these amounts may be material, the 
counterparties are all regulated institutions with high credit ratings assigned by international credit rating agencies and fall 
within the large exposure limits set by regulatory requirements.

Credit risk in the Securities division is limited as Winterflood trade in the cash markets with regulated counterparties on a 
delivery versus payment basis such that any counterparty risk is limited to price movements in the underlying securities. 
Counterparty exposure and settlement failure monitoring controls are in place.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued127

Maximum exposure to credit risk
The table below presents the group’s maximum exposure to credit risk, before taking account of any collateral and credit risk 
mitigation, arising from its on balance sheet and off balance sheet financial instruments. For off balance sheet instruments, the 
maximum exposure to credit risk represents the contractual nominal amounts.

On balance sheet
Cash and balances at central banks
Settlement balances
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers
Debt securities
Loans to money brokers against stock advanced
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial assets

Off balance sheet
Undrawn commitments

Total maximum exposure to credit risk

31 July
2016
£ million

31 July
2015
£ million

847.4
478.1
121.5
6,431.6
221.3
52.4
44.7
42.3
8,239.3

1,038.0
398.3
84.6
5,737.8
149.5
38.4
19.7
36.5
7,502.8

962.7

862.4

9,202.0

8,365.2

Assets pledged and received as collateral
The group pledges assets for repurchase agreements and securities borrowing agreements which are generally conducted 
under terms that are customary to standard securitised borrowing contracts.

The group has securitised without recourse £1,443.9 million (31 July 2015: £1,164.8 million) of its insurance premium and 
motor loan receivables in return for debt securities in issue of £1,015.9 million (31 July 2015: £847.7 million), which includes 
£168.1 million (31 July 2015: £nil) debt securities in issue retained for liquidity purposes. As the group has retained exposure to 
substantially all the credit risk and rewards of the residual benefit of the underlying assets it continues to recognise these 
assets in loans and advances to customers in its consolidated balance sheet.

The group accesses the Funding for Lending Scheme which enables it to borrow highly liquid UK Treasury Bills from the  
Bank of England in exchange for eligible collateral. At 31 July 2016, asset finance loan receivables of £737.4 million (31 July 
2015: £705.6 million) and some of the £168.1 million (31 July 2015: £nil) debt securities in issue retained for liquidity purposes 
were positioned in exchange for £451.0 million (31 July 2015: £375.0 million) Treasury Bills drawn. The term of these 
transactions is four years from the date of drawdown. The group also had repurchase agreements whereby the Treasury Bills 
were lent in exchange for cash included within loans and overdrafts from banks. The Treasury Bills are not recorded on the 
group’s consolidated balance sheet as ownership remains with the Bank of England. The risk and rewards of the loans and 
advances to customers remain with the group and continue to be recognised in the consolidated balance sheet.

Loans to money brokers against stock advanced of £52.4 million (31 July 2015: £38.4 million) is the cash collateral provided to 
these institutions for stock borrowing by Winterflood. The stock borrowing to which the cash deposits relate is short-term in 
nature and is recorded at the amount payable.

The majority of loans and advances to customers are secured against specific assets. The security will correspond to the type 
of lending as detailed in the segmental loan book analysis on page 23 of the Strategic Report. Consistent and prudent lending 
criteria are applied across the whole loan book with emphasis on the quality of the security provided.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements128

28. Financial risk management continued
Financial assets: Loans and advances to customers
Credit risk management and monitoring
The overall credit risk appetite is set by the group board. The monitoring of credit policy is the responsibility of the Banking 
division’s risk and compliance committees. All large loans are subject to approval by the Banking division’s credit committees. 
Retail, Commercial and Property Finance each use credit underwriting and monitoring measures appropriate to the diverse 
and specialised nature of their lending.

The Banking division has a dual approach to mitigating credit risk by:
•  Lending on a secured basis with emphasis on both the customer’s ability to repay and the quality of the underlying security 

to minimise any loss should the customer not be able to repay; and

•  Where the security collateralising a loan is less tangible, or in cases of higher loan to valuation (“LTV”), greater scrutiny is 

applied both analytically and in terms of escalation of sanctioning authority.

The Banking division’s collections and recoveries processes are designed to provide a fair, consistent and effective operation 
for arrears management. The Banking division seeks to engage in early communication with borrowers experiencing difficulty 
in meeting their repayments, to obtain their commitment to maintaining or re-establishing a regular payment plan. 

The Banking division maintains a forbearance policy to support customers in financial difficulty and ensures the necessary 
processes and policies are in place to enable consistently fair treatment of each customer. At the same time, the Banking 
division ensures these processes and policies do not restrict the ability to manage customers based on their individual 
circumstances. This includes considering whether it is appropriate to change the terms and conditions of a loan, e.g. by 
extending its term, changing the type of loan, deferring interest or by capitalising arrears to assist a customer in financial 
difficulties. The Banking Division seeks to ensure that any forbearance results in a fair outcome for the customer and will not 
repossess an asset unless all other reasonable attempts to resolve the position have failed. The loan loss provision takes 
account of the credit risk that arises from forbearance. At 31 July 2016, and following a review of the forbearance policy during 
the year, the gross carrying amount of exposures with forbearance measures was £123.5 million (31 July 2015: £109.2 million).

Retail Finance is predominantly high volume secured lending with a small average loan size. Credit issues are identified early 
via largely automated tracking processes. Remedial actions are implemented promptly to restore customers to a performing 
status or recovery methods are applied to minimise potential loss.

Commercial Finance is a combination of several niche lending businesses with a diverse mix of loans in terms of assets 
financed, and average loan size and LTV percentage. Credit quality is predominately assessed on an individual loan by loan 
basis. Recovery activity is executed promptly by experts in the specialised assets. This approach allows remedial action to be 
implemented at the appropriate time to minimise potential loss.

Property Finance is a portfolio of higher value, low volume lending with credit quality assessed on an individual loan by loan 
basis. Loans are continually monitored to determine whether they are performing satisfactorily. 

In Property and Commercial Finance performing loans with elevated levels of credit risk may be placed on watch lists 
depending on the perceived severity of the credit risk.

Much of the Banking division’s lending is short term and the average loan size is small with the result that individual loans have 
little capacity to materially impact the group’s earnings.

Credit risk reporting
Loans and advances to customers, as disclosed in note 11, are analysed between the following categories for credit risk 
reporting:

(i) Neither past due nor impaired
These loans and advances to customers reflect the application of consistent and conservative lending criteria on inception 
and the quality and level of security held. The contractual repayments are monitored to ensure that classification as neither 
past due nor impaired remains appropriate and also demonstrates the short-term nature of the lending, with £3.5 billion (2015: 
£3.1 billion) having a contractual maturity of less than 12 months.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued129

The following table shows the ageing of loans and advances to customers split by credit assessment method which are 
neither past due nor impaired.

Within one month
Between one and three months
Between three months and one year
Over one year

31 July 2016 
Loans and advances to customers

31 July 2015 
Loans and advances to customers

Individually
assessed
£ million
454.7
441.1
894.9
813.0

Collectively
assessed
£ million
279.6
422.0
1,054.9
1,776.8

Total
£ million
734.3
863.1
1,949.8
2,589.8

Individually
assessed
£ million
512.0
250.6
729.6
642.4

Collectively
assessed
£ million
269.4
385.3
960.2
1,660.4

Total
£ million
781.4
635.9
1,689.8
2,302.8

2,603.7

3,533.3

6,137.0

2,134.6

3,275.3

5,409.9

(ii) Past due but not impaired
Loans and advances to customers are classified as past due but not impaired when the customer has failed to make a 
payment when contractually due but there is no evidence of impairment. This includes loans which are individually assessed 
for impairment but where the value of security is sufficient to meet the required repayments. This also includes loans to 
customers which are past due for technical reasons such as delays in payment processing or rescheduling of payment terms.

The following table shows the ageing of loans and advances to customers split by credit assessment method which are past 
due but for which no impairment provision has been raised.

Within one month
Between one and three months
Between three months and one year
Over one year

31 July 2016 
Loans and advances to customers

31 July 2015 
Loans and advances to customers

Individually
assessed
£ million
19.4
62.4
42.2
22.2

Collectively
assessed
£ million
7.6
9.1
17.4
15.5

Total
£ million
27.0
71.5
59.6
37.7

Individually
assessed
£ million
31.1
61.9
41.9
13.9

Collectively
assessed
£ million
14.7
4.9
24.7
28.6

Total
£ million
45.8
66.8
66.6
42.5

146.2

49.6

195.8

148.8

72.9

221.7

(iii) Impaired
The factors considered in determining whether assets are impaired are outlined in the accounting policies in note 1(k). 
Impaired loans and advances to customers are analysed according to whether the impairment provisions are individually or 
collectively assessed.

Individually assessed provisions are determined on a case by case basis, taking into account the financial condition of the 
customer and an estimate of potential recovery from the realisation of security. Typically this methodology is applied by the 
Property Finance business and by the invoice finance business within Commercial Finance.

Collectively assessed provisions are considered on a portfolio basis, to reflect the homogeneous nature of the assets. A 
percentage of the portfolio is impaired by evaluating the ageing of missed payments combined with the historical recovery 
rates for that particular portfolio as discussed in note 2(a). Typically this methodology is applied by the Retail Finance 
businesses and the asset finance business within Commercial Finance.

The gross impaired loans are quoted without taking account of any collateral or security held, which could reduce the 
potential loss. The application of conservative LTV ratios on inception and the emphasis on the quality of the security provided 
are reflected in the low provision to gross impaired balance ratio (“coverage ratio”) of 38% (2015: 35%).

The following table shows gross impaired loans and advances to customers and the provision thereon split by assessment 
method.

Gross impaired loans
Provisions

Net impaired loans

31 July 2016 
Loans and advances to customers

31 July 2015 
Loans and advances to customers

Individually
assessed
£ million
75.4
(37.4)

Collectively
assessed
£ million
83.1
(22.3)

Total
£ million
158.5
(59.7)

Individually
assessed
£ million
69.7
(34.7)

Collectively
assessed
£ million
92.6
(21.4)

Total
£ million
162.3
(56.1)

38.0

60.8

98.8

35.0

71.2

106.2

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements130

28. Financial risk management continued
The amount of interest income accrued on impaired loans and advances to customers was £16.2 million (31 July 2015: £14.6 
million).

The group holds collateral against loans and advances to customers in the form of residential and commercial property and 
charges over business assets such as equipment, inventory and accounts receivable. Analysis by LTV ratio is provided below 
based on the group’s lending facilities to customers where the exposure at origination exceeded £1.0 million, excluding 
Property Finance facilities written pre 2009. Lending below this threshold has greater homogeneity predominately in the motor 
and premium finance businesses with typical LTV ratio between 80% to 90%. The value of collateral used in determining the 
LTV ratio is based upon data captured at loan origination, or where available, a more recent updated valuation.

Gross loans and advances to customers where exposure at origination exceeded £1.0 million:

LTV
Less than 70%
70% to 90%
Greater than 90%

At 31 July 2016

LTV
Less than 70%
70% to 90%
Greater than 90%

At 31 July 2015

Asset
finance
£ million

Invoice
finance
£ million

Property
£ million

Total
£ million

68.9
115.7
139.3

134.2
182.5
4.0

1,228.1
25.1
–

1,431.2
323.3
143.3

323.9

320.7

1,253.2

1,897.8

Asset
finance
£ million

59.3
75.5
88.2

Invoice
finance
£ million

149.8
126.9
2.3

Property
£ million

Total
£ million

1,002.6
20.3
–

1,211.7
222.7
90.5

223.0

279.0

1,022.9

1,524.9

Financial assets: Settlement balances
Credit risk management and monitoring
The credit risk presented by settlement balances in the Securities division is limited as such balances represent delivery 
versus payment transactions where delivery of securities occurs simultaneously with payment. The credit risk is therefore 
limited to the change in market price of a security between trade date and settlement date and not the absolute value of the 
trade. Winterflood is a market-maker and trades on a principal only basis with regulated counterparties including 
stockbrokers, wealth managers, institutions and hedge funds who are either authorised and regulated by the PRA and/or FCA 
or equivalent regulator in the respective country.

Credit risk reporting
Settlement balances are classified as neither past due nor impaired when the respective trades have not yet reached their 
settlement date. Settlement balances are classified as past due but not impaired when trades fail to be settled on their 
contractual settlement date. The credit risk presented by settlement balances which are past due is mitigated by the delivery 
versus payment mechanism, as well as by Winterflood trading only with regulated counterparties. Counterparty exposure and 
settlement failure monitoring controls are in place as part of an overall risk management framework and settlement balances 
past due are actively managed.

The following table shows the ageing of settlement balances:

Within one month
Between one and three months
Between three months and one year
Over one year

31 July 2016

31 July 2015

Neither past
due nor
impaired
£ million
449.9
–
–
–

Past due
but not
impaired
£ million
25.8
1.0
0.6
0.8

Neither past
due nor
impaired
£ million
378.9
–
–
–

Total
£ million
475.7
1.0
0.6
0.8

Past due
but not
impaired
£ million
16.2
1.0
0.9
1.3

Total
£ million
395.1
1.0
0.9
1.3

449.9

28.2

478.1

378.9

19.4

398.3

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued131

(d) Market risk
Market risk is the risk that a change in the value of an underlying market variable, such as interest or foreign exchange rates, 
will give rise to an adverse movement in the value of the group’s assets and arises primarily in the Securities division.

Interest rate risk
The group’s exposure to interest rate fluctuations relates primarily to the returns from its capital and reserves. The group’s 
policy is to match repricing characteristics of assets and liabilities naturally where possible or by using interest rate swaps 
where necessary to secure the margin on its loans and advances to customers. These interest rate swaps are disclosed in 
note 14.

The sensitivities below are based upon reasonably possible changes in interest rate scenarios, including parallel shifts in the 
yield curve. Changes in interest rates compared to actual rates would increase/(decrease) the group’s annual net interest 
income by the following amounts:

1.0% increase
0.5% decrease

2016
£ million
4.7
(2.4)

2015
£ million
4.3
(2.2)

Changes in interest rates compared to actual rates would increase/(decrease) the group’s equity by the following amounts:

1.0% increase
0.5% decrease

2016
£ million
8.7
(4.3)

2015
£ million
11.3
(5.7)

Foreign currency risk
The group has a limited number of currency investments and has chosen not to hedge these exposures. These investments 
are predominantly in euros. Foreign exchange differences which arise from the translation of these operations are recognised 
directly in equity.

A change in the euro exchange rate would decrease the group’s equity by the following amounts:

20% strengthening of sterling against the euro

2016
£ million
(2.6)

2015
£ million
(5.6)

The group has additional material currency assets and liabilities primarily as a result of treasury operations in the Banking 
division. These assets and liabilities are matched by currency, using exchange rate derivative contracts where necessary. 
Details of these contracts are disclosed in note 14. Other potential group exposures arise from share trading settled in foreign 
currency in the Securities division, and foreign currency equity investments. The group has policies and processes in place to 
manage foreign currency risk, and as such the impact of any reasonably expected exchange rate fluctuations would not be 
material.

Market price risks
Trading financial instruments: Equity shares and debt securities
The group’s trading activities relate to Winterflood. The following table shows the group’s trading book exposure to market 
price risk.

For the year ended 31 July 2016
Equity shares
Long
Short

Debt securities
Long
Short

Highest
exposure
£ million

Lowest
exposure
£ million

Average
exposure
£ million

Exposure
at 31 July
£ million

55.6
25.3

25.2
7.1

27.3
14.1

10.6
7.0

35.0
12.6

22.4

15.0
10.3

4.7

26.1
13.5

12.6

20.3
5.8

14.5

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements132

28. Financial risk management continued

For the year ended 31 July 20151
Equity shares
Long
Short

Debt securities
Long
Short

Highest
exposure
£ million

Lowest
exposure
£ million

Average
exposure
£ million

Exposure
at 31 July
£ million

53.7
44.0

27.7
9.5

50.2
56.2

14.0
2.9

37.1
16.2

20.9

25.4
27.5

(2.1)

31.1
14.1

17.0

14.1
13.7

0.4

1 

 2015 exposures exclude Seydler which was disposed of in January 2015.

With respect to the long and short positions on debt securities £1.7 million and £0.1 million (2015: £2.7 million and £0.6 million) 
were due to mature within one year respectively.

The average exposure has been calculated on a daily basis. The highest and lowest exposures occurred on different dates 
and therefore a net position of these exposures does not reflect a spread of the trading book.

Based upon the trading book exposure given above, a hypothetical fall of 10% in market prices would result in a £1.3 million 
decrease (2015: £1.7 million decrease) in the group’s income and net assets on the equity trading book and a £nil impact 
(2015: £nil) on the debt securities trading book. However, the group’s trading activity is mainly market-making where positions 
are managed throughout the day on a continuous basis. Accordingly, the sensitivity referred to above is purely hypothetical.

Non-trading financial instruments
Net gains and losses on non-trading financial instruments are disclosed in notes 12 and 13.

(e) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that liabilities cannot be met when they fall due or can only be met at an uneconomic price and arises 
mainly in the Banking division.

The group has a prudent liquidity position with total available funding at 31 July 2016 of £8.2 billion (31 July 2015: £7.5 billion). 
This funding is significantly in excess of its loans and advances to customers at 31 July 2016 of £6.4 billion (31 July 2015: £5.7 
billion). The group has a large portfolio of high quality liquid assets principally including cash placed on deposit with the Bank 
of England. The group measures liquidity risk with a variety of measures including regular stress testing and cash flow 
monitoring, and reporting to both the group and divisional boards.

The following table analyses the contractual maturities of the group’s on balance sheet financial liabilities on an undiscounted 
cash flow basis.

At 31 July 2016
Settlement balances
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue
Loans from money brokers against stock 

advanced

Subordinated loan capital
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial liabilities

On
demand
£ million

In less
than three
months
£ million

In more 
than three 
months but 
not more 
than six 
months
£ million

In more 
than six 
months but 
not more 
than one 
year
£ million

In more 
than
one year 
but not 
more than 
five years
£ million

In more
than five
years
£ million

–
31.8
124.7
11.0
–

30.0
–
0.2
37.2

456.3
1.9
925.6
208.0
10.1

–
1.7
4.3
82.9

–
15.8
741.3
75.2
9.0

–
11.0
1,419.8
86.1
572.5

–
10.9
1,765.1
90.9
851.7

–
–
2.1
2.6

–
1.7
4.3
1.0

–
13.6
20.8
1.1

–
–
–
–
42.2

–
62.0
1.9
–

Total
£ million

456.3
71.4
4,976.5
471.2
1,485.5

30.0
79.0
33.6
124.8

Total

234.9

1,690.8

846.0

2,096.4

2,754.1

106.1

7,728.3

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued133

At 31 July 2015
Settlement balances
Deposits by banks
Deposits by customers
Loans and overdrafts from banks
Debt securities in issue
Loans from money brokers against stock 

advanced

Subordinated loan capital
Derivative financial instruments
Other financial liabilities

In more than 
three months 
but not more 
than six 
months
£ million

In more than 
six months 
but not more 
than one 
year
£ million

In more than 
one year but 
not more 
than five 
years
£ million

In less
than three
months
£ million

376.5
1.0
832.8
99.4
10.1

–
1.7
7.7
64.9

–
17.6
954.8
124.1
9.3

–
4.5
1,431.1
0.3
19.3

–
0.5
1,191.8
152.6
1,124.2

–
–
1.8
2.7

–
1.7
4.0
1.3

–
13.6
25.4
1.8

On
demand
£ million

–
11.5
149.9
8.6
–

–
–
–
32.9

In more
than five
years
£ million

–
–
–
–
311.6

–
65.4
5.9
0.2

Total
£ million

376.5
35.1
4,560.4
385.0
1,474.5

–
82.4
44.8
103.8

Total

202.9

1,394.1

1,110.3

1,462.2

2,509.9

383.1

7,062.5

Derivative financial instruments in the table above includes net currency swaps. The following table shows the currency swaps 
on a gross basis:

At 31 July 2016
At 31 July 2015

In more than 
three months 
but not more 
than six 
months 
£ million
2.1
1.8

In more than 
six months 
but not more 
than one 
year 
£ million
4.3
4.0

In more than 
one year but 
not more 
than five 
years 
£ million
20.8
25.4

In less 
than three 
months 
£ million
62.2
174.3

On 
demand 
£ million
19.5
–

In more 
than five
years 
£ million
1.9
5.9

Total 
£ million
110.8
211.4

29. Company transition to FRS 102
For all periods up to and including the year ended 31 July 2015 the company prepared its financial statements in accordance 
with previously extant United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (“UK GAAP”). This is the first year that the 
company has presented its results under FRS 102. The date of transition was 1 August 2014. The company has taken 
advantage of FRS 102 transitional provision to account for its investment in subsidiaries at deemed cost, which is the carrying 
amount at the date of transition as determined under UK GAAP.

The company has applied the accounting policies disclosed in note 1 where applicable, as they are consistent with FRS 102 
with the exception of tax on share-based payments which is similar to UK GAAP. There are no changes in accounting policies 
which require reconciliation of profit after tax for the year ended 31 July 2015, and shareholders’ funds at 1 August 2014 and 
31 July 2015, between UK GAAP as previously reported and FRS 102.

Reclassification of interest free loan to subsidiary
Following the adoption of FRS 102, the interest free loan to subsidiary that was previously presented as fixed assets has been 
reclassified in the company balance sheet as a current asset. This reclassification has no impact on shareholders’ funds or 
the profit after tax of the company accounts.

30. Post balance sheet event
On 16 September 2016, the group agreed the sale of its subsidiary, OLIM Limited (“OLIM”), an investment management 
company which operates within the Asset Management division, to Albion Ventures LLP. The consideration is subject to the 
future revenues generated by OLIM. At 31 July 2016 the activities disposed of represented net assets of £0.4 million and 
operating profit before tax of £0.9 million for the year. The timing for completion is subject to the satisfaction of customary 
conditions.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatements134

31. Investments in subsidiaries
In accordance with section 409 of the Companies Act 2006 the following is a list of the group’s subsidiaries at 31 July 2016 
which are all wholly-owned and incorporated in the UK unless otherwise stated.

Group
Close Brothers Holdings Limited1
Close Derivatives Limited1
Close Securities (Germany) Limited1
Close Securities Holdings Limited1

Banking
Arrow Audit Services Limited15, 16
Air & General Finance Limited2
Armed Services Finance Limited5
Brook Funding (No.1) Limited13, 16
CBM Holdings Limited1
CLL I Limited1
Close Asset Finance Limited2
Close Brewery Rentals Limited6
Close Brothers Asset Finance GmbH (Germany)1
Close Brothers Factoring GmbH (Germany)1
Close Brothers Finance plc1
Close Brothers Limited1
Close Brothers Military Services Limited5
Close Brothers Technology Services Limited1
Close Business Finance Limited2
Close Credit Management (Holdings) Limited1
Close Finance (CI) Limited (Jersey)1
Close International Bank Holdings Limited (Guernsey)4
Close Invoice Finance Limited1
Close Leasing Limited1
Close Motor Finance Limited5
Close PF Funding I Limited14, 16
Close Trust Nominees Limited1
Commercial Acceptances Limited7
Commercial Finance Credit Limited2
Commercial Vehicle Hire Limited1
Ecasks Limited6
Finance for Industry Limited1

Banking continued
Finance for Industry Services Limited1
Kingston Asset Finance Limited2
Kingston Asset Leasing Limited2
Metropolitan Factors Limited1
Micgate Holdings (UK) Limited1
Orbita Funding 2016-1 plc13, 16
Surrey Asset Finance Limited2

Securities
W.S. (Nominees) Limited3
Winterflood Client Nominees Limited3
Winterflood Gilts Limited3
Winterflood Securities Holdings Limited3
Winterflood Securities Limited3

Asset Management
Cavanagh Financial Management Limited8
CBF Wealth Management Limited1
CFSL Management Limited1
Chartwell Private Client Limited1
Close Asset Management Holdings Limited1
Close Asset Management Limited1
Close Asset Management (UK) Limited1
Close Brothers Properties Guernsey Limited (Guernsey)4
Close International Asset Management Holdings Limited 

(Guernsey)4

Close Investments Limited1
Close Portfolio Management Limited1
Close Properties Jersey Limited (Jersey)9
Lion Nominees Limited1
Mackay Stewart and Brown Limited10
OLIM Limited11
Place Campbell Close Brothers Limited (50% joint venture)12

Registered office:
  1  10 Crown Place, London EC2A 4FT, United Kingdom.
  2  Wimbledon Bridge House, Hartfield Road, Wimbledon, London SW19 3RU, United Kingdom.
  3  The Atrium Building Cannon Bridge, 25 Dowgate Hill, London EC4R 2GA, United Kingdom.
  4  1st and 2nd Floors, Elizabeth House, Les Ruettes Brayes, St Peter Port, GY1 1EW, Guernsey.
  5  Roman House, Roman Road, Doncaster, South Yorkshire DN4 5EZ, United Kingdom.
  6  Unit 1, Kingfisher Park, Headlands Business Park, Ringwood, Hampshire BH24 3NX, United Kingdom.
  7  100 George Street, London W1U 8NU, United Kingdom.
  8  1st Floor, Lomond House, 9 George Square, Glasgow, Scotland G2 1DY, United Kingdom.
  9  47 Esplanade, St Helier JE1 0BD, Jersey.
10  Saltire Court, 3rd Floor, West Wing, 20 Castle Terrace, Edinburgh, Scotland EH1 2EN, United Kingdom.
11  15 Berkeley Street, London W1J 8DY, United Kingdom.
12  Wilmington House, High Street, East Grinstead, West Sussex RH19 3AU, United Kingdom.
13  35 Great St. Helen’s, London EC3A 6AP, United Kingdom.
14  Wilmington Trust Sp Services (London) Limited, Third Floor, 1 King’s Arms Yard, London EC2R 7AF, United Kingdom.
15  145-157 St John Street, London EC1V 4PW, United Kingdom.

Subsidiaries by virtue of control:
16  The related undertakings are not considered subsidiaries of the group but are included in the consolidated financial statements as they are controlled by the group.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016The Notes continued135

For the Financial Overview, Banking, Securities and Asset Management 
Adjusted: Adjusted measures are used to increase comparability between periods and exclude amortisation of intangible 
assets on acquisition, and any goodwill impairments and exceptional items.

Bad debt ratio: Impairment losses on average net loans and advances to customers and operating lease assets.

Compensation ratio: Total staff costs on operating income.

Earnings per share: Profit after tax plus non-controlling interests on number of basic shares.

Exceptional items: Income or costs which are material in size and non-recurring in nature.

Expense/income ratio: Total adjusted operating expenses on operating income.

High quality liquid assets: Assets which qualify as high quality liquid assets for FCA liquidity purposes, including deposits 
with the Bank of England, gilts and Treasury Bills drawn under the Funding for Lending Scheme.

Leverage ratio: Tier 1 capital as a percentage of total balance sheet assets, adjusting for certain capital deductions, 
including intangible assets, and off balance sheet exposures.

Net interest margin: Net income generated by lending activities, including net interest income, net fees and commissions 
and net operating lease income (deducting depreciation), on average net loans and advances to customers and operating 
lease assets.

Return on net loan book: Adjusted operating profit from lending activities on average net loans and advances to customers 
and operating lease assets.

Return on opening equity: Adjusted operating profit after tax and non-controlling interests on opening equity, excluding 
non-controlling interests.

Revenue margin: Income from advice, investment management and related services on total client assets.

Term funding: Funding with a remaining maturity greater than 12 months.

Re-presentation of Treasury Income and Operating Lease Assets
As announced on 13 September 2016, we have implemented minor changes to the calculation of our key metrics in the 
Banking division to better represent the contribution of operating lease assets and the role of Treasury. The net interest margin 
now includes the full amount of Treasury income (2015: £13.4 million), which is allocated to individual lending businesses, 
reflecting its role as a cost centre. Furthermore, operating lease income has been adjusted to deduct depreciation of 
operating lease assets (2015: £16.7 million), which is now reported as a cost of sales and included in operating income in the 
group’s consolidated income statement. The calculation of key ratios has also been adjusted to take into account the value of 
operating lease assets (2015: average of £115.4 million) on the balance sheet.

These adjustments do not reflect any changes in the underlying business and have no effect on the adjusted operating profit 
or operating profit before tax, earnings per share, balance sheet or regulatory capital measures.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016StrategicReportGovernanceFinancialStatementsGlossary136

Financial calendar (provisional)

Event
First quarter trading update
Annual General Meeting
Final dividend payment
Pre-close trading update
Half year end
Interim results
Third quarter trading update
Pre-close trading update
Financial year end
Preliminary results

Date
November 2016
17 November 2016
22 November 2016
January 2017
31 January 2017
March 2017
May 2017
July 2017
31 July 2017
September 2017

The financial calendar is updated on a regular basis throughout the year. Please refer to our website www.closebrothers.com 
for up-to-date details.

Cautionary Statement

Certain statements included or incorporated by reference within this report may constitute “forward-looking statements” in 
respect of the group’s operations, performance, prospects and/or financial condition. Forward-looking statements are 
sometimes, but not always, identified by their use of a date in the future or such words as “anticipates”, “aims”, “due”, “could”, 
“may”, “will”, “should”, “expects”, “believes”, “intends”, “plans”, “potential”, “targets”, “goal” or “estimates”. By their nature, 
forward-looking statements involve a number of risks, uncertainties and assumptions and actual results or events may differ 
materially from those expressed or implied by those statements. Accordingly, no assurance can be given that any particular 
expectation will be met and reliance should not be placed on any forward-looking statement. Additionally, forward-looking 
statements regarding past trends or activities should not be taken as a representation that such trends or activities will 
continue in the future. No responsibility or obligation is accepted to update or revise any forward-looking statement resulting 
from new information, future events or otherwise. Nothing in this report should be construed as a profit forecast. This report 
does not constitute or form part of any offer or invitation to sell, or any solicitation of any offer to purchase any shares or  
other securities in the company, nor shall it or any part of it or the fact of its distribution form the basis of, or be relied  
on in connection with, any contract or commitment or investment decisions relating thereto, nor does it constitute a 
recommendation regarding the shares or other securities of the company. Past performance cannot be relied upon as a guide 
to future performance and persons needing advice should consult an independent financial adviser. Statements in this report 
reflect the knowledge and information available at the time of its preparation. Liability arising from anything in this report shall 
be governed by English law. Nothing in this report shall exclude any liability under applicable laws that cannot be excluded in 
accordance with such laws.

Close Brothers Group plc Annual Report 2016Investor RelationsAuditor
Deloitte LLP

Solicitor
Slaughter and May

Corporate Brokers
J.P. Morgan Cazenove
UBS Investment Bank

Registrar
Capita Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent BR3 4TU

Shareholder helpline: 0871 664 0300 (Calls cost 12p per minute plus your phone company’s access charge)  
From overseas: +44 (0)20 8639 3399
Lines are open from 9.00 am to 5.30 pm Monday to Friday, excluding UK public holidays
Email: shareholderenquiries@capita.co.uk
Website: www.capitashareportal.com

Registered Office
Close Brothers Group plc
10 Crown Place
London EC2A 4FT

Telephone: +44 (0)20 7655 3100
Email: enquiries@closebrothers.com
Website: www.closebrothers.com

Company No. 520241

Printed by Park Communications on FSC® certified paper.

Park is EMAS certified; its Environmental Management System is certified to ISO14001.

100% of the inks used are vegetable oil based, 95% of press chemicals are recycled for further use 
and, on average 99% of any waste associated with this production will be recycled.

This document is printed on Carbon Balanced Regency Satin; a paper made from 10% recycled fibre 
and 90% virgin fibre sourced from responsibly managed forests, certified in accordance with the Forest 
Stewardship Council®.

The unavoidable carbon emissions generated during the manufacture and delivery of this document, 
have been reduced to net zero through a verified carbon offsetting project.

Designed by Emperor Design Consultants Limited.

Typeset by RR Donnelley.

Photography by Richard Davies.

Close Brothers Group plc
10 Crown Place
London EC2A 4FT
Tel: +44 (0)20 7655 3100

www.closebrothers.com

C

l

o

s

e

B

r

o

t

h

e

r

s

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

6

LENDING  |  DEPOSITS  |  WEALTH MANAGEMENT  |  SECURITIES